Delta Ia-Cnc Lathe Application Om MM en 20200430

Delta CNC Lathe Machine Solution Operation and Maintenance Manual
Industrial Automation Headquarters

Delta Electronics, Inc.
Taoyuan Technology Center
No.18, Xinglong Rd., Taoyuan District,
Taoyuan City 33068, Taiwan
TEL: 886-3-362-6301 / FAX: 886-3-371-6301
EMEA
Asia Headquarters: Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.
Delta Electronics (Shanghai) Co., Ltd. Sales: [email protected]
No.182 Minyu Rd., Pudong Shanghai, P.R.C. Marketing: [email protected]
Post code : 201209 Technical Support: [email protected]
TEL: 86-21-6872-3988 / FAX: 86-21-6872-3996 Customer Support: [email protected]
Customer Service: 400-820-9595 Service: [email protected]
TEL: +31(0)40 800 3800
Delta Electronics (Japan), Inc.
Tokyo Office BENELUX: Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.
Industrial Automation Sales Department De Witbogt 20, 5652 AG Eindhoven, The Netherlands
2-1-14 Shibadaimon, Minato-ku Mail: [email protected]
Tokyo, Japan 105-0012 TEL: +31(0)40 800 3800
TEL: 81-3-5733-1155 / FAX: 81-3-5733-1255 DACH: Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.
Coesterweg 45, D-59494 Soest, Germany
Delta Electronics (Korea), Inc. Mail: [email protected]
Seoul Office
TEL: +49(0)2921 987 0
1511, 219, Gasan Digital 1-Ro., Geumcheon-gu,
Seoul, 08501 South Korea France: Delta Electronics (France) S.A.
TEL: 82-2-515-5305 / FAX: 82-2-515-5302 ZI du bois Challand 2, 15 rue des Pyrénées,
Lisses, 91090 Evry Cedex, France
Delta Energy Systems (Singapore) Pte Ltd. Mail: [email protected]
4 Kaki Bukit Avenue 1, #05-04, Singapore 417939 TEL: +33(0)1 69 77 82 60
TEL: 65-6747-5155 / FAX: 65-6744-9228
Iberia: Delta Electronics Solutions (Spain) S.L.U
Delta Electronics (India) Pvt. Ltd.
Delta CNC Lathe Machine

Ctra. De Villaverde a Vallecas, 265 1º Dcha Ed.
Plot No.43, Sector 35, HSIIDC Gurgaon, Hormigueras – P.I. de Vallecas 28031 Madrid
PIN 122001, Haryana, India TEL: +34(0)91 223 74 20
TEL: 91-124-4874900 / FAX : 91-124-4874945 Carrer Llacuna 166, 08018 Barcelona, Spain
Solution
Mail: [email protected]
Delta Electronics (Thailand) PCL.
909 Soi 9, Moo 4, Bangpoo Industrial Estate (E.P.Z), Italy: Delta Electronics (Italy) S.r.l.
Pattana 1 Rd., T.Phraksa, A.Muang, Ufficio di Milano Via Senigallia 18/2 20161 Milano (MI)
Operation and
Samutprakarn 10280, Thailand Piazza Grazioli 18 00186 Roma Italy
TEL: 66-2709-2800 / FAX : 662-709-2827 Mail: [email protected]
TEL: +39 02 64672538
Delta Energy Systems (Australia) Pty Ltd.
Maintenance Manual
Unit 20-21/45 Normanby Rd., Notting Hill Vic 3168, Australia Russia: Delta Energy System LLC
TEL: 61-3-9543-3720 Vereyskaya Plaza II, office 112 Vereyskaya str.
17 121357 Moscow Russia
Americas Mail: [email protected]
TEL: +7 495 644 3240
Delta Electronics (Americas) Ltd.
Raleigh Office Turkey: Delta Greentech Elektronik San. Ltd. Sti. (Turkey)
P.O. Box 12173, 5101 Davis Drive, Şerifali Mah. Hendem Cad. Kule Sok. No:16-A
Research Triangle Park, NC 27709, U.S.A. 34775 Ümraniye – İstanbul
TEL: 1-919-767-3813 / FAX: 1-919-767-3969 Mail: [email protected]
TEL: + 90 216 499 9910
Delta Greentech (Brasil) S/A
São Paulo Office GCC: Delta Energy Systems AG (Dubai BR)
Rua Itapeva, 26 – 3˚ Andar - Bela Vista P.O. Box 185668, Gate 7, 3rd Floor, Hamarain Centre
CEP: 01332-000 – São Paulo – SP - Brasil Dubai, United Arab Emirates
TEL: 55-11-3530-8642 / 55-11-3530-8640 Mail: [email protected]
TEL: +971(0)4 2690148
Delta Electronics International Mexico S.A. de C.V.
Mexico Office Egypt + North Africa: Delta Electronics
Vía Dr. Gustavo Baz No. 2160, Colonia La Loma, 511 Cairo Business Plaza, North 90 street,
54060 Tlalnepantla Estado de Mexico New Cairo, Cairo, Egypt
TEL: 52-55-2628-3015 #3050/3052 Mail: [email protected]
www.deltaww.com
*We reserve the right to change the information in this manual without prior notice. DELTA_IA-CNC_Lathe application_OM_MM_EN_20200430
Preface
Thank you for purchasing this product. Read this manual carefully before using the product to ensure the
correct use of the product. Keep this manual handy for quick reference whenever needed.
This manual includes:

 Installation and inspection of NC controllers
 Wiring for connectors of the NC controllers
 Description of the function and operation of NC controllers
 Description of parameters
 Troubleshooting
NC controller product features:

 Built-in 32-bit high-speed dual CPU for multi-task execution, improving operating
performance
 User-friendly human machine interface
 Interfaces for auto tuning and gain adjustment of the servo, meeting different machine
characteristics
 CNCSoft software for configuring user-defined screens
 Front USB interface (port) for easy data access, data backup, and parameter file copying
 In Spindle mode, you can control the spindle system with DMCNET communication or analog
voltage according to the requirements
 Serial I/O modules for flexible I/O configuration
How to use this manual:

Use this manual as a reference when installing, setting up, using, and maintaining the NC
controller. Read this manual before using and setting this product.
Delta technical services:

Consult your Delta equipment distributors or Delta Customer Service Center if you encounter any
problem.
i
Safety Precautions
 Refer to the pin assignments when wiring. Ensure the product is properly grounded.
 Do not disassemble the controller, change the wiring, or touch the power supply when the
power is on to avoid electric shock.
Pay special attention to the following safety precautions at all times during installation, wiring, operation,
maintenance, and examination of the controller.
The symbols of “DANGER”, “WARNING” and “STOP” indicate:
Danger. May cause severe or fatal injuries to personnel if the instructions are not followed.
Warning. May cause moderate injury to personnel, or lead to severe damage or even
malfunction of the product if the instructions are not followed.
Absolute prohibited activities. May cause serious damage or even malfunction of the
product if the instructions are not followed.
Installation
 Follow the installation instructions in the manual, or it may result in damage to the
equipment.
 Do not expose the product to an environment containing vapor, corrosive gas,
inflammable gas, or other foreign matter to reduce the risk of electric shock or fire.
Wiring
 Connect the ground terminal to class-3 ground system. Ground resistance should not
exceed 100 Ω. Improper grounding may result in electric shock or fire.
Operation
 Correctly plan the I/O configuration with the MLC editor software, or abnormal operation
may occur.
 Before operating the machine, properly adjust the parameter settings, otherwise it may
cause abnormal operation or malfunction.
 Ensure you can activate the emergency stop at any time, and avoid operating the
machine in unprotected condition.
ii
 Do not change the wiring when the power is on, or it may lead to personal injury caused
by electric shock.
 Do not use a sharp-pointed object to touch the panel. Doing this may dent the screen and
lead to malfunction of the controller.
Maintenance and Inspection
 When the power is on, do not disassemble the controller panel or touch the internal parts
of the controller, or it may cause electric shock.
 Do not touch the wiring terminal within 10 minutes after turning off the power since the
residual voltage may cause electric shock.
 Turn off the power before replacing the battery, and check the system settings after the
replacement.
 Do not block the ventilation holes when operating the controller since poor ventilation
may cause malfunction of the controller.
Wiring Method
 Power supply: use a 24 VDC power supply for the controller and comply with the wire
specification when wiring to avoid danger.
 Wire selection: use stranded wires and multi-core shielded-pair wires for signal cables.
 Cable length: the maximum cable length of the signal cable for remote I/O and DMCNET
communication is 20 m and the maximum cable length of other signal cables is 10 m.
 The local I/O and remote I/O require an additional 24 VDC power for signal input and
output.
Wiring of Communication Circuit
 DMCNET wiring: the wiring materials should comply with the standard specification.
 Make sure the controller and servo drive are firmly connected, or loose cables may
cause abnormal operation.
Note: the content of this manual may be revised without prior notice. Download the latest version from Delta’s website at
https://www.deltaww.com/.
iii
(This page is intentionally left blank.)
iv
Table of Contents
Before Operation
Product Inspection and Model Explanation

1.1 Product inspection ······························································································1-2
1.2 Model explanation ·······························································································1-3
1.3 Product interface of NC controller ···········································································1-5
Installation
2.1 Precautions ·······································································································2-2
2.2 Ambient storage conditions ···················································································2-2
2.3 Ambient installation conditions ···············································································2-4
2.4 Mounting direction and space ················································································2-4
2.5 Outline and mounting dimensions ···········································································2-5
2.6 OPENCNC operating interface installation ································································2-8
Wiring
3.1 Product interface ································································································3-2
3.2 Connectors of the controller ··················································································3-6
3.2.1 NC2 series connectors ··················································································3-6
3.2.2 OPENCNC series connectors ·········································································3-8
3.3 Wiring for power connector ·················································································3-10
3.4 Wiring for RS-485 connector ···············································································3-11
3.5 Wiring for spindle feedback input connector ····························································3-12
3.6 Wiring for spindle analog output connector ·····························································3-13
3.7 Wiring for HSI connector ····················································································3-15
3.8 Wiring for emergency stop ··················································································3-17
3.9 Wiring for MPG connector ···················································································3-18
3.10 Wiring for Remote I/O connector·········································································3-22
3.11 Wiring for local I/O connector ·············································································3-26
Operation and Settings
Table of Group Function

4.1 Tables of group function ······················································································ 4-2
4.2 Machine operation panel A - function of keys ··························································4-11
4.3 Machine operation panel B - function of keys ··························································4-13
4.4 Table of corresponding buttons (for OPENCNC models) ···········································4-15
Introduction to NC System Modes

5.1 Auto mode (AUTO) ·····························································································5-2
5.2 Program edit mode (EDIT) ····················································································5-2
5.3 Manual input mode (MDI) ·····················································································5-2
5.4 MPG mode (MPG) ······························································································5-2
5.5 Jog mode (JOG) ·································································································5-2
5.6 Rapid mode (RAPID) ···························································································5-3
5.7 Homing mode (HOME) ·························································································5-3
5.8 Group screen overview ························································································5-4
Position (POS) Group

6.1 Absolute coordinates ···························································································6-3
6.2 Relative coordinates ····························································································6-3
6.3 Machine coordinates ···························································································6-3
Program (PRG) Group

7.1 Ethernet setting ··································································································7-3
7.2 Create a new file (NEW F) ····················································································7-8
7.3 Copy files (COPY F) ····························································································7-9
7.4 Paste files (PASTE) ·····························································································7-9
7.5 Delete (delete files and directories) ·······································································7-10
7.6 Select / cancel selection of multiple files
(SEL TOGL / CANCEL & ALL SEL TOGL / CANCEL) ················································7-10
7.7 Rename files (RENAME) ····················································································7-12
7.8 Create directories (FOLDER)···············································································7-13
7.9 Search for files (FIND F) ·····················································································7-14
7.10 File merging (MERGE) ·····················································································7-14
7.11 Sequencing (SORT) ························································································7-15
7.12 Convert DXF files ····························································································7-16
7.13 Macro files ·····································································································7-17
7.14 File editing (File edit) ························································································7-17
7.14.1 Line search (LABEL) ·················································································7-18
7.14.2 String search (STRING) ·············································································7-18
7.14.3 Edit a section of program (B START / B END)·················································7-20
7.14.4 Delete (lines and blocks) ············································································7-21
7.14.5 Copy (lines and blocks) and paste ································································7-21
7.14.6 Undo ·····································································································7-21
7.15 Graphic edit (lathe system) ················································································7-22
7.15.1 Objective ································································································7-22
7.15.2 Project management ·················································································7-22
7.15.3 Description of graphic edit procedures for lathe system ·····································7-25
7.15.4 Operation steps for graphic programming ······················································7-45
7.16 Program function in other modes ········································································7-47
Offset (OFS) Group

8.1 Coordinate setting (COORD) ·················································································8-2
8.1.1 Auto set (AUTO) ··························································································8-3
8.1.2 Absolute input (ABS) ·····················································································8-7
8.1.3 Incremental input (INC) ·················································································8-9
8.2 Tool setting ·····································································································8-10
8.2.1 Tool length setting (Tool Offset)·····································································8-10
8.3 Tool magazine management ···············································································8-15
8.3.1 Multi-magazine management ········································································8-20
8.4 Macro variables ································································································8-21
8.4.1 Local variables (LOCAL) ··············································································8-21
8.4.2 Global variables (GLOBAL) ··········································································8-22
8.4.3 Non-volatile variables (HOLD) ·······································································8-22
8.4.4 Extension variables (EXTEND) ·····································································8-22
Diagnosis (DGN) Group

9.1 Machining information (PROCESS) ········································································9-2
9.2 User variable (USR VAR) ·····················································································9-4
9.3 MLC ·················································································································9-5
9.3.1 Bit (BIT) ·····································································································9-5
9.3.2 Register (REG) ····························································································9-6
9.3.3 Device monitoring (DEV MON) ········································································9-7
9.3.4 Line search (JUMP TO) ·················································································9-8
9.3.5 Editor (EDITOR) ··························································································9-9
9.3.6 Operation (SET)·························································································9-12
9.4 System monitoring (SYS MON) ············································································9-13
9.4.1 Servo monitoring (SRV MON) ·······································································9-13
9.4.2 I/O monitoring (I/O MON) ·············································································9-13
9.4.3 Variable monitoring (VAR MON) ····································································9-14
9.5 Password setting (PWD) ····················································································9-16
9.5.1 System security (S SCP) ·············································································9-16
9.5.2 Machine security (M SCP) ············································································9-17
9.5.3 User security (U1 SCP & U2 SCP) ·································································9-19
9.5.4 Time limit (EXPIRE) ····················································································9-20
9.6 System information (STATUS) ·············································································9-23
9.7 Gain tuning (TUNING) ·······················································································9-24
9.8 Import (IMPORT) ······························································································9-27
9.9 Export (EXPORT) ·····························································································9-28
9.10 Multi-language (TEXT WR) ···············································································9-30
9.11 LOGO (LOGO WR) ·························································································9-30
Alarm (ALM) Group

10.1 Alarm (ALARM) ······························································································10-2
10.2 Alarm history (HISTORY) ··················································································10-3
Graph (GRA) Group

11.1 Trajectory display ····························································································11-2
11.2 Program simulation (Preview) ············································································11-3
Parameter Settings
Parameter (PAR) Group

12.1 Machining parameter (PROCESS) ······································································12-3
12.1.1 Machining parameter descriptions ································································12-4
12.2 Operating parameter (OPERATE) ·······································································12-9
12.2.1 Operating parameter descriptions ······························································ 12-10
12.3 Tool magazine parameter (MAGA) ···································································· 12-20
12.3.1 Tool magazine parameter descriptions ························································ 12-21
12.4 Spindle parameter (SPINDLE) ········································································· 12-22
12.4.1 Spindle parameter descriptions·································································· 12-23
12.5 Machine parameter (MACHINE) ······································································· 12-29
12.5.1 Machine parameter descriptions ································································ 12-30
12.6 Homing parameter (HOME) ············································································· 12-32
12.6.1 Homing parameter descriptions ································································· 12-33
12.7 Ethernet setting (ETH.) ··················································································· 12-37
12.7.1 Ethernet parameter descriptions ································································ 12-38
12.8 Compensation parameter (COMP) ···································································· 12-39
12.8.1 Compensation parameter descriptions ························································ 12-40
12.9 System parameter (SYSTEM) ·········································································· 12-43
12.9.1 System parameter descriptions·································································· 12-44
12.10 MLC setting (MLC) ······················································································· 12-50
12.10.1 MLC parameter descriptions···································································· 12-51
12.11 Graph parameter (GRAPHIC) ········································································· 12-54
12.11.1 Graph parameter descriptions·································································· 12-55
12.12 Servo parameter (SERVO) ············································································ 12-56
12.12.1 Servo parameter descriptions ·································································· 12-57
12.13 Channel setting (CONFIG) ············································································ 12-60
12.14 RIO setting (SET RIO) ·················································································· 12-61
12.14.1 Details of RIO setting ············································································· 12-62
12.14.2 Setting DAC module (NC-EIO-DAC04) ······················································ 12-63
12.15 Search (SEARCH) ······················································································· 12-64
12.16 Parameter group (PAR GRP) ········································································· 12-64
12.17 Other settings ····························································································· 12-66
12.17.1 Setting for absolute motor ······································································· 12-66
12.17.2 Setting synchronous motion control ·························································· 12-68
12.17.3 Command transfer ················································································ 12-71
Customized Function
Software (SOFT) Group

13.1 ScreenEditor software ······················································································13-2
How to check MLC status
MLC Special M Relay and Special D Register

14.1 Introduction to MLC special M relay and special D register ······································ 14-2
14.2 Special M relay bit output (from MLC to NC)························································· 14-3
14.2.1 MLC and NC systems related special M output ·············································· 14-3
14.2.2 NC system related special M output ····························································· 14-4
14.2.3 NC axes related special M output ································································ 14-6
14.2.4 Spindle related special M output ································································· 14-7
14.3 Special M relay bit input (from NC to MLC) ·························································· 14-8
14.3.1 MLC and NC systems related special M input ················································ 14-8
14.3.2 NC system related special M input ······························································ 14-9
14.3.3 M, S, T codes related special M input ························································· 14-10
14.3.4 NC axes related special M input ································································ 14-11
14.3.5 Spindle, tool magazine, and MLC axes related special M input ························ 14-13
14.3.6 Lathe Spindle / C axis mode related special M input ······································ 14-13
14.4 Special D register output (from MLC to NC) ······················································· 14-14
14.4.1 MLC and NC systems special D output ······················································ 14-14
14.4.2 NC system related special D output ··························································· 14-15
14.4.3 NC axes related special D output ······························································ 14-16
14.5 Special D register input (from NC to MLC) ························································· 14-17
14.5.1 MLC and NC systems related special D input ·············································· 14-17
14.5.2 M, S, T codes related special D input ························································· 14-18
14.5.3 NC axes related special D input ································································ 14-19
14.6 NC / MLC axis mode switch ············································································ 14-20
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
15.1 Alarm description ··························································································· 15-2
15.1.1 MLC errors (1200 - 13FF) ·········································································· 15-3
15.1.2 Servo errors (1E00) ················································································· 15-4
15.1.3 Remote I/O errors (1F00) ·········································································· 15-5
15.1.4 HMI related alarms (3010 - 3FFF) ······························································· 15-5
15.1.5 NC system errors (4200 - 4FFF) ································································· 15-7
15.1.6 Machining related alarms (B000 - B0FF) ····················································· 15-10
15.1.7 Tool compensation related alarms (B100 - B1FF) ·········································· 15-12
15.1.8 Lathe related alarms (B300 - B3FF) ···························································· 15-13
15.1.9 Command related alarms (B600 - B6FF; B64x not included) ···························· 15-14
15.1.10 Synchronous motion and temperature compensation related
alarms (B640 - B645) ············································································ 15-17
15.1.11 Lathe cycle command alarms (B10D, B6A1 - B6A5) ····································· 15-17
Product Inspection and
Model Explanation
Before using the NC series products, read this chapter for information about the model
explanation and product interface.
1.1 Product inspection ·············································································1-2

1.2 Model explanation ·············································································1-3
1.3 Product interface of NC controller ·························································1-5
1-1
Product Inspection and Model Explanation Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual
1.1 Product inspection

In case of packaging mistakes or damages during shipping, check the items listed in the
1
following table carefully. If any issue occurs, contact the distributor for service.
Item Content
Check the model number on the nameplate of the controller. Refer to
Purchased product
Section 1.2 Model explanation.
Buttons Press the buttons to check if the operation is smooth*.
Appearance Visually check if there are any damages on the exterior of the product.
Connectors Check if there are any loose or untightened connectors.
Note: check the buttons for all models except for the NC30E(H) series, which does not have operation
panels.
1-2
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Product Inspection and Model Explanation
1.2 Model explanation

 Nameplate information
Model number
1
Input power
Barcode and
serial number
 Model explanation
NC series controller (MOP integrated)
NC2 0 0 A – L I – A E
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
(1) Series name

NC2: 2 series controller
(2) Display
0: 8” screen
(3) Screen orientation

0: horizontal
(4) Series type

A: A series
P: MPG series (MPG included)
(5) Model
M: milling
L: lathe
(6) Type
I: integrated (machine operation panels integrated)
(7) Version
A: standard
1-3
(8) Language
Blank: Traditional Chinese
S: Simplified Chinese
1 E: English
OPENCNC series controller
NC30 E
(1) (2)
(1) Series name

NC30: 3 series controller
(2) Series type

E: embedded series
EH: embedded multi-axis series
1-4
1.3 Product interface of NC controller

NC200A-LI-A_
No. Item No. Item

(1) Screen (5) Machine operation panel B
(2) Machine operation panel A (6) USB port
(3) CYCLE START (7) Function keys
(4) FEED HOLD - -
1-5
NC200P-LI-A_
No. Item No. Item

(1) Screen (6) USB port
(2) Machine operation panel A (7) Function keys
(3) CYCLE START (8) Emergency stop
(4) FEED HOLD (9) MPG
(5) Machine operation panel B - -
1-6
NC30E(H)
No. Item No. Item

(1) Indicators (8) PAN interface
(2) Remote I/O module connector (9) USB ports
(3) HSI connector (10) VGA connector
(4) MPG connector (11) Ethernet connector
(5) Spindle connector (12) DMCNET connector
(6) 24 VDC power input (13) Mode switch
(7) CF card slot - -
1-7
1-8
Installation
Follow the precautions and storage and installation conditions specified in this chapter
when installing the product. In addition, outline dimensions and hardware specifications
of the product are provided.
2.1 Precautions ······················································································2-2

2.2 Ambient storage conditions ··································································2-2
2.3 Ambient installation conditions ·····························································2-4
2.4 Mounting direction and space ·······························································2-4
2.5 Outline and mounting dimensions ·························································2-5
2.6 OPENCNC operating interface installation ··············································2-8
2-1
Installation Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual
2.1 Precautions
Follow the precautions and specifications of voltage, current, temperature, and other conditions
2
specified in the manual, or personnel injury and equipment damage may occur.
2.2 Ambient storage conditions

Before installation, this product must be kept in the shipping carton. To retain the warranty
coverage and ensure future maintenance, follow these instructions for storage. While the product
is temporarily not in use:
 Store the product in a dust-free and dry location.
 Store the product in an ambient temperature range of -20°C to +60°C (-4°F to +140°F).
 Store the product in a relative humidity range of 10% to 95% RH (non-condensing).
 Avoid storing the product in an environment containing corrosive gas and liquids.
 The environment should be free of devices that generate excessive heat; no water, vapor,
dust, and oily dust; no corrosive and inflammable gas or liquids; no airborne dust or metal
particles; the environment should be solid without vibration and interference of
electromagnetic noise.
 Hardware specifications:
NC2 series lathe controller

Model NC200A-LI-A_ NC200P-LI-A_
Operating
10% to 95% RH [0°C to +55°C (32°F to 131°F)]
environment
Storage environment 10% to 95% RH [-20°C to +60°C (-4°F to +140°F)]
Cooling method Natural cooling
Voltage 24 VDC (-10% to +15%) (built-in isolated circuit)
Dielectric withstanding
Between 24 VDC and FG terminals: 500 VAC for 1 minute
voltage
Power consumption 15 W (24V; 0.6 A)
Memory backup
3V lithium battery (CR2032) × 1
battery
Varies according to the ambient temperature and operating conditions;
Backup battery life
approximately 3 years in room temperature of 25°C (77°F)
Dimensions Refer to the outline dimension table in Section 2.5.
Weight 4.5 kg 4.7 kg
2-2
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Installation
OPENCNC series controller

Model NC30E(H)
Operating
2
10% to 95% RH [0°C to +55°C (32°F to 131°F)]
environment
Storage environment 10% to 95% RH [-20°C to +60°C (-4°F to +140°F)]
Cooling method Natural cooling
Voltage 24 VDC (-10% to +15%) (built-in isolated circuit)
Dielectric withstanding
Between 24 VDC and FG terminals: 500 VAC for 1 minute
voltage
Power consumption 15 W (24V; 0.6 A)
Memory backup
3V lithium battery (CR2032) × 1
battery
Varies according to the ambient temperature and operating conditions;
Backup battery life
approximately 3 years in room temperature of 25°C (77°F)
Dimensions Refer to the outline dimension table in Section 2.5.
Weight 0.8 kg
2-3
2.3 Ambient installation conditions

Operating temperature for the NC series controller: 0°C - 55°C (32°F - 131°F).
2 During long-term operation, the suggested temperature of the operating environment should be
below 45°C (113°F). If the temperature is above 45°C, place the product in a distribution board
which is well-ventilated and without overheating risks. Also check if the vibration of the machine
affects the electrical devices in the distribution board.
In addition, follow these precautions when choosing the installation site to retain the warranty
coverage and ensure future maintenance for the Delta NC controller.
 The environment should be free of devices that generate excessive heat; no water, vapor,
dust, and oily dust; no corrosive and inflammable gas or liquids; no airborne dust or metal
particles; the environment should be solid without vibration and interference of
electromagnetic noise.
 The temperature and humidity of the installation site for the NC controller should be within
the range specified in the specification.
 Avoid storing the NC controller in an environment where the vibration exceeds the range
specified in the specification.
2.4 Mounting direction and space

The NC series controller must be installed vertically on a dry and solid platform which complies
with the requirement of NEMA. For better ventilation and cooling, allow sufficient clearance
space between the controller and its adjacent objects and the wall (the clearance is suggested to
be 50 mm (around 2 inches)).
Important:
 For better ventilation and cooling, allow sufficient clearance space between the NC controller
and the adjacent objects and the wall, or it may cause malfunction of the machine.
 Do not block the ventilation holes of the NC controller, or it may cause malfunction of the
machine.
2-4
2.5 Outline and mounting dimensions

Appearance and dimension tables of NC2 lathe series
NC200-A-LI-A_ dimension drawing

2
NC200-P-LI-A_ dimension drawing
2-5
Outline dimension table

Model
NC200A-LI-A_ NC200P-LI-A_
Dimension
2
A 400 mm 400 mm
B 390 mm 390 mm
C 320 mm 320 mm
D 310 mm 310 mm
E 22 mm 22 mm
F 70 mm 70 mm
G 130 mm* 130 mm*
Note: this is the minimum required space for installation.
Mounting dimension table

Model
NC200A-LI-A_ NC200P-LI-A_
Dimension
H 302 ± 0.3 mm 302 ± 0.3 mm
H1 310 mm 310 mm
W 378 ± 0.3 mm 378 ± 0.3 mm
W1 130 mm 130 mm
W2 130 mm 130 mm
W3 130 mm 130 mm
I Φ4 mm Φ4 mm
2-6
Appearance and dimension tables of OPENCNC series
NC30E(H) dimension drawing
Outline dimension table
Model
NC30E(H)
Dimension
A 60 mm
B 19 mm
C 196 mm
D 213 mm
E 164 mm
G 70 mm
Mounting dimension table
Model
NC30E(H)
Dimension
H1 201 ± 0.3 mm
W1 19 ± 0.3 mm
I M5
2-7
2.6 OPENCNC operating interface installation

 Operating interface installation
2
A. Connect the OPENCNC series controller to standard operating interfaces, including
(1) Delta HMI screen, (2) keyboard (functions the same as machine operation panel A), and
(3) machine operation panel B.
B. Connect the OPENCNC series controller to non-Delta operating interfaces, including
(4) screen and (5) keyboard.
Connect the OPENCNC series controller to (6) ASDA series AC servo drives, (7) ASDA-S
spindle servo drive, (8) ECMA series servo motors, and (9) ECMS series spindle servo motor.
2-8
 Connection through computer and network
Connect the OPENCNC series controller to (3) ASDA series AC servo drives, (4) ASDA-S
2
spindle servo drive, (5) ECMA series servo motors, and (6) ECMS series spindle servo motor
through the computer and network, including (1) PC-based controller and (2) mouse and the
public software for Delta OPENCNC.
2-9
2-10
Wiring
This chapter illustrates the wiring and connectors of the controller, and provides the
wiring diagrams for each function.
3.1 Product interface ···············································································3-2

3.2 Connectors of the controller ·································································3-6
3.2.1 NC2 series connectors ·································································3-6
3.2.2 OPENCNC series connectors ························································3-8
3.3 Wiring for power connector ································································ 3-10
3.4 Wiring for RS-485 connector ······························································ 3-11
3.5 Wiring for spindle feedback input connector··········································· 3-12
3.6 Wiring for spindle analog output connector ············································ 3-13
3.7 Wiring for HSI connector ··································································· 3-15
3.8 Wiring for emergency stop ································································· 3-17
3.9 Wiring for MPG connector ································································· 3-18
3.10 Wiring for Remote I/O connector ······················································· 3-22
3.11 Wiring for local I/O connector ···························································· 3-26
3-1
Wiring Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual
3.1 Product interface

 NC2 series
3 NC200A-LI-A_
Description of each connector:

No. Connector Description
Connects to high-speed serial I/O module: each module has 32 DI and
(1) Remote I/O 32 DO points. The maximum distance between stations is 20 m (65.62 ft)
and the total length can be up to 160 m (20 m x 8) (524.94 ft).
(2) HSI High-speed counter and emergency stop input signal.
One set of spindle encoder input signal.
(3) Spindle One set of analog output signal.
One set of RS-485 serial communication signal.
Connects to an external MPG (powered by the built-in 5 VDC power).
(4) MPG
7 DI and 1 DO points are available.
(5) CF card For storing G-code programs.
(6) Ethernet For DNC control and system monitoring.
(7) DMCNET High-speed communication network interface.
(8) Emergency stop Only available on NC200A-LI-A models.
(9) - Battery holder.
(10) 24 VDC power 24 VDC power input for supplying power to the controller.
(11) DI: 8 input points.
Local I/O LI series
(12) DO: 5 output points.
(13) 24 VDC power For supplying power to the local I/O.
3-2
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Wiring
NC200P-LI-A_
(4)

and the total length can be up to 160 m (20 x 8) (524.94 ft).
(4) - Embedded MPG of machine operation panel B.
(6) Ethernet For DNC control and system monitoring.
(8) Emergency stop Only available on NC200A-LI-A models.
(9) - Battery holder.
(11) DI: 8 input points.
Local I/O LI series
(12) DO: 5 output points.
For supplying power to the local I/O and the lights for CYCLE START and
(13) 24 VDC power
FEED HOLD buttons.
Safety precautions for installation:

1. Check if the wiring for 24 VDC power is correct.
2. Remote I/O requires an additional 24 VDC power supply to drive X input and Y output.
3. Short-circuit IES (emergency stop) to have the controller ready for use.
4. If an alarm occurs or the emergency stop signal is on, power off the servo drive by
disconnecting the power at the magnetic contactor (MC) with Y output.
3-3
 OPENCNC series
NC30E(H)

(1) - Indicators.
and the total length can be up to 160 m (20 m x 8) (524.94 ft).
Connects to an external MPG (powered by the built-in 5 VDC power).
(4) MPG
8 DI points are available.
(8) PAN One USB connector for connecting to machine operation panel B.
Three USB host connectors for connecting to the mouse, keyboard, and
(9) USB
flash drive.
(10) VGA For connecting to a screen.
(11) Ethernet Ethernet interface.
(13) - Mode switch for switching the debugging mode.
3-4
Debugging mode:
Setting value Mode
Standard mode
3
Indicator description:
PWR Green: system power on
Flashing green: system ready
RDY
Orange: in modes 1 - 3
0
SON Green: system ready
RIO Green: remote I/O connection is normal
ETH Green: network communication is normal
Red: system alarm occurs
ALM
Flashing green: software updating
1 System update mode
2 Default mode
Reset IP to default setting
Default IP:
3 Controller IP 192.168.1.11
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
Remote PC IP 192.168.1.10
Safety precautions for installation:

1. Check if the wiring for 24 VDC power is correct.
2. Remote I/O requires an additional 24 VDC power supply to drive X input and Y output.
3. If an alarm occurs or the emergency stop signal is on, power off the servo drive by
disconnecting the power at the magnetic contactor (MC) with Y output.
3-5
3.2 Connectors of the controller

3.2.1 NC2 series connectors
3
Symbol Function Description
Connects to 24 VDC power (15 W at 0.6 A).
Symbol Description
0V, +24V, Power input for +24V +24 VDC power
controller
0V 0 VDC power
Power grounding
Connects to 24 VDC power (15 W at 0.6 A).

Power input for Symbol Description
0V, +24V machine operation
panel B +24V +24 VDC power
0V 0 VDC power
Power specifications for DI points:
voltage < 24 VDC, current: 8 - 25 mA.
DI
Pin No. Description
X112 - X119 DI points X112 - X119, 8 points in total.
I/O
Power specifications for DO points:
voltage < 24 VDC, current < 120 mA.
DO
Pin No. Description
Y112 - Y116 DO points Y112 - Y116, 5 points in total.
Includes signals of spindle feedback, analog output, and 1 set of
RS-485 serial communication.
Pin No. Description
P1 RS485_GND
P2 RS485_D+
P3 RS485_D-
P4 SP_OUT
P5 SP_GND
P6 Reserved
SPINDLE Spindle connector P7 EMG_IN; connects to +24 VDC
P8 SP_A+
P9 SP_A-
P10 DC +5V_OUT
P11 SP_B+
P12 SP_B-
P13 SP_Z+
P14 SP_Z-
P15 GND
7 DI points, 1 DO point, and 1 set of differential type MPG input
signal.
Pin No. Description
P1 DI_COM; connects to +24 VDC or 0V
P2 - P7 DI (X28 - X33)
P8 DI (X26)
MPG MPG connector P9 DO (Y27)
P10 DC +5V_OUT (< 200 mA)
P11 XA+
P12 XA-
P13 XB+
P14 XB-
P15 GND
3-6

2 sets of high-speed and 1 set of emergency stop input signal.
Pin No. Description
3
P1 EMG_IN
High-speed counter P2 EMG_GND
HSI and emergency
stop input signal P3 HSI_1 (Counter C78, enter [M2142])
P4 HSI_COM; connects to +24 VDC or 0V
P5 HSI_2 (Counter C79, enter [M2143])
P6 HSI_COM; short-circuit P4 and P6.
Remote I/O module communication signals, including X256 - X511
and Y256 - Y511. Each module has 32 DI and 32 DO points, and
the controller can connect to up to 8 modules.
Pin No. Description
P1 TX+
Remote I/O module
REMOTE I/O P2 TX-
connector
P3 RX-
P4 RX+
P5 GND
P6 SHIELD
Connects to PC with an RJ45 connector and a network cable.
Pin definition of both ends:
Pin No. / color of end A Pin No. / color of end B
1: orange & white 1: orange & white
2: orange 2: orange
ETHERNET Ethernet connector 3: green & white 3: green & white
4: blue 4: blue
5: blue & white 5: blue & white
6: green 6: green
7: brown & white 7: brown & white
8: brown 8: brown
Connects to Delta's DMCNET servo drive with standard RJ45
DMCNET
DMCNET connector. The wiring method is the same as that of the Ethernet
connector
connector.
A normally-closed contact. Press to open the circuit in an
EMG Emergency stop
emergency.
CYCLE CYCLE START
CYCLE START contact
START button
FEED HOLD FEED HOLD button FEED HOLD contact
The emergency stop contact. The EMG flag is enabled in a broken
Emergency stop
IES circuit. (Wire it to the normally-closed contact of the emergency
contact
stop button.)
Note:
1. The IES connector is the input contact of the emergency stop signal. Enable the EMG flag in a broken
circuit.
2. The power for the lights of CYCLE START and FEED HOLD buttons is 24 VDC.
3-7
3.2.2 OPENCNC series connectors
3
Connects to the 24 VDC power (15 W at 0.6 A).
Symbol Description
Power input for +24V +24 VDC power
0V, +24V, controller
0V 0 VDC power
Power grounding
Includes signals of spindle feedback, analog output, and 1 set of

RS-485 serial communication.
Pin No. Description
P1 RS485_GND
P2 RS485_D+
P3 RS485_D-
P4 SP_OUT
P5 SP_GND
P6 Reserved
SPINDLE Spindle connector
P7 Reserved
P8 SP_A+
P9 SP_A-
P10 DC +5V_OUT
P11 SP_B+
P12 SP_B-
P13 SP_Z+
P14 SP_Z-
P15 GND
8 DI points and 1 set of differential type MPG signal input.
Pin No. Description
P1 DI_COM; connects to +24 VDC or 0V
P2 - P9 DI (X28 - X35)
P10 DC +5V_OUT (< 200 mA)
MPG MPG connector
P11 XA+
P12 XA-
P13 XB+
P14 XB-
P15 GND
2 sets of high-speed and 1 set of emergency stop input signal.
Pin No. Description
P1 EMG_IN (+5 VDC output)
High-speed counter P2 MODE_ENABLE (+5 VDC output)
HSI and emergency stop
input signal P3 HSI_1 (Counter C78, enter [M2142])
P4 GND
P5 HSI_2 (Counter C79, enter [M2143])
P6 HSI_COM; connects to +24 VDC or 0V
3-8

Remote I/O module communication signals, including X256 -
X511 and Y256 - Y511. Each module has 32 DI points and 32
DO points, and the controller can connect to up to 8 modules.
3
Pin No. Description
P1 TX+
Remote I/O module
REMOTE I/O P2 TX-
connector
P3 RX-
P4 RX+
P5 GND
P6 SHIELD
Connector for
The USB host connector for connecting to machine operation
PAN2 machine operation
panel B. No connection to USB devices.
panel B
USB connectors for connecting to USB devices, such as flash
USB USB connector drive, mouse, and keyboard. Connection in series is not
supported by this connector.
Connect to an external monitor (only monitors with the refresh
VGA VGA connector
rate of 60 Hz is supported).
Connects to PC with an RJ45 connector and a network cable.
Pin definition of both ends:
Pin No. / color of end A Pin No. / color of end B
1: orange & white 1: orange & white
2: orange 2: orange
ETHERNET Ethernet connector 3: green & white 3: green & white
4: blue 4: blue
5: blue & white 5: blue & white
6: green 6: green
7: brown & white 7: brown & white
8: brown 8: brown
Connect to Delta's DMCNET servo drive with standard RJ45
DMCNET DMCNET connector connector. Wiring method is the same as that of the Ethernet
connector.
MODE Debugging mode Debugging mode switch
3-9
3.3 Wiring for power connector

The wiring method for the power connector of the NC series controller is apply power directly to
3
the 24 VDC connector.
 NC2 series models
24 VDC power supply
DCOUT 24 VDC
AC
ACIN
power
FG 24 VDC
FG
 OPENCNC series models
24 VDC power supply
DCOUT 24 VDC
AC
ACIN
power
FG
FG
24 VDC
3-10
3.4 Wiring for RS-485 connector

The NC series controller has one RS-485 connector for serial communication with external
3
devices.
The pin assignment for NC2 series models is as follows.
(1) RS-485 connector (female); (2) RS-485 connector (male)
Model Symbol Pin No. Function description

2 D+
NC2_ _ SPINDLE
3 D-
The pin assignment for OPENCNC series models is as follows.
(1) RS-485 connector (female); (2) RS-485 connector (male)

2 D+
NC30E_ SPINDLE
3 D-
3-11
3.5 Wiring for spindle feedback input connector

The NC series controller has one set of spindle feedback input.
3 The pin assignment for NC2 series models is as follows.
(1) Spindle feedback input connector (female); (2) Spindle feedback input connector (male)
(1) Spindle feedback input connector (female); (2) Spindle feedback input connector (male)
The function description of each pin is as follows.

8 SP_A+ Spindle encoder A+ pulse input
9 SP_A- Spindle encoder A- pulse input
10 DC +5V_OUT Spindle encoder power output (+5 VDC)
11 SP_B+ Spindle encoder B+ pulse input
All SPINDLE
12 SP_B- Spindle encoder B- pulse input
13 SP_Z+ Spindle encoder Z+ pulse input
14 SP_Z- Spindle encoder Z- pulse input
15 GND Ground for spindle encoder power
3-12
3.6 Wiring for spindle analog output connector

The NC series controller has one set of spindle analog output for controlling the spindle speed.

3
(1) Spindle analog output connector (female); (2) Spindle analog output connector (male)
(1) Spindle analog output connector (female); (2) Spindle analog output connector (male)

4 SP_OUT Spindle analog output
All SPINDLE Ground for spindle analog output
5 SP_GND
signal
Settings for analog spindle:
Step1: set Pr399.

Bit Description Setting range
Spindle function
0 0-1
0: off; 1: on
Closed-loop control flag
1 0-1
0: off; 1: on (feedback encoder is required)
Spindle output mode
2-3 0-2
0: DMCNET (servo spindle); 1: reserved; 2: EDAC (analog output)
3-13
Bit Description Setting range

Speed control mode
4 1
1: PUU
3
Spindle encoder magnification
5 0-1
0: 1000 times; 1: 4 times
Step 2: in the [CONFIG] (channel setting) screen, enable SP1 and set its port number to 10.
Step 3: when using analog spindle to output signals, connect to pins 4 and 5 of the SPINDLE
connector. The outputs 0 - 10 VDC correspond to S0 (zero speed) to maximum speed.
(The resolution of -10V to +10V is 12-bit.)
Controller
SP_OUT/pin 4
Delta Analog output
Inverter SP_GND/pin 5
Inverter card (NC-EXM_S01)
3-14
3.7 Wiring for HSI connector

The NC series controller has two sets of hardware high-speed counter signal input. For the
3
wiring of high-speed counter input (bi-directional coupling), the maximum input bandwidth is up
to 5 MHz; voltage: 22 - 26V; permissible current: 8 - 20 mA; surge current: below 50 mA.
The corresponding special M relay for HSI_1 is M2142, which is also applicable to G31 Skip
command.
Settings of relevant parameters.

Parameter
Parameter name Function
address
Bit 0 G31 high speed input 1 contact 0: NC; 1: NO
Pr25
Bit 1 G31 high speed input 2 contact 0: NC; 1: NO
Bit 4 G31 high speed input 1 switch 0: off; 1: on
Pr46
Bit 5 G31 high speed input 2 switch 0: off; 1: on
Pr307 Bit 4 - 5 G31 input source 0: off; 1: HSI 1; 2: HSI 2; 3: HSI 1 & 2
Note: the connection direction of the external power input for HSI does not affect the operation.
(1) HSI connector (female); (2) HSI connector (male)

3 HSI_1 High-speed counter input 1 (10 mA)
High-speed counter COM; connects to +24 VDC or
4 HSI_COM
NC2_ _ HSI 0V
6 HSI_COM High-speed counter COM; short-circuit P4 and P6.
3-15
(1) HSI connector (female); (2) HSI connector (male)

4 GND GND
NC30E_ HSI 5 HSI_2 High-speed counter input 2 (10 mA)
High-speed counter COM; connects to +24 VDC
6 HSI_COM
or 0V
Note: HSI_1 and HSI_2 can output +5V power, so both of them can form a circuit with GND.
3-16
3.8 Wiring for emergency stop

The NC series controller has one set of emergency stop signal input.

3
(1) & (2) EMG pins; (3) Emergency stop button

7 EMG_IN Emergency stop power input (+24 VDC)
SPINDLE
15 GND Ground for emergency stop power input
NC2__
1 EMG_IN Emergency stop input
HSI
2 EMG_GND Ground for emergency stop input
(1) EMG pins; (2) Emergency stop button

1 EMG_IN EMG (+5 VDC output)
NC30E_ HSI
4 GND GND
3-17
3.9 Wiring for MPG connector

The NC series controller has one MPG connector for receiving MPG pulses. This connector
3
supplies +5 VDC power which directly supplies power to the MPG.
(1) MPG connector (female); (2) MPG connector (male)

1 DI_COM DI_COM; connects to +24 VDC or 0V
2 DI_1 X28
3 DI_2 X29
4 DI_3 X30
5 DI_4 X31
6 DI_5 X32
7 DI_6 X33
NC2_ _ MPG 8 DI_7 X26
9 DO_8 Y27
10 DC +5V_OUT DC +5V_OUT
11 XA+ XA+
12 XA- XA-
13 XB+ XB+
14 XB- XB-
15 GND GND
3-18
(1) MPG connector (female); (2) MPG connector (male)

1 DI_COM DI_COM; connects to +24 VDC or 0V
2 DI_1 X28
3 DI_2 X29
4 DI_3 X30
5 DI_4 X31
6 DI_5 X32
7 DI_6 X33
NC30E_ MPG 8 DI_7 X34
9 DI_8 X35
10 DC +5V_OUT DC +5V_OUT
11 XA+ XA+
12 XA- XA-
13 XB+ XB+
14 XB- XB-
15 GND GND
3-19
Wiring for MPG pulse input. The controller supplies 5 VDC power to the MPG.
5V_OUT
3
XA+
XA-
MPG XB+ Controller
XB-
5V_GND
DI pin wiring:
3.3V
Axis X IN1 (X28)
EXT-24V DIG24
MPG
+5_OUT
+5VD2_RMT
+5_GND +5_GND
The signal type determines the wiring for MPG (only applicable to 100-ppr type), including
single-ended type (EHDW-BA6SI) and differential type (EHDW-BE6SI).
Wiring diagram for single-ended type MPG (EHDW-BA6SI):

MPG connector (Female) MPG connector (Male)
on NC controller
1: 24V input force selection

2: X28 7: AXIS 1
3: X29 8: AXIS 2
4: X30 9: AXIS 3
5: X31 11: RATE*1
6: X32 12: RATE*10
7: X33 13: RATE*100
10: +5V 2: 0 VDC

(provided internally) 1: DC POWER
11: A+
12: A- 3: A
13: B+
14: B- 4: B
15: GND (5V)
3-20
Wiring diagram for differential type MPG (EHDW-BE6SI):

MPG connector (Female) MPG connector (Male)
on NC controller
1: 24V input force selection

2: X28
3: X29
7: AXIS X
8: AXIS Y
3
4: X30 9: AXIS Z
5: X31
6: X32 12: RATE*10
7: X33 13: RATE*100
10: +5V 2: 0 VDC

(provided internally) 1:DC POWER
11: A+ 3: A+
12: A- 5: A-
13: B+ 4: B+
14: B- 6: B-
15: GND (5V)
3-21
3.10 Wiring for Remote I/O connector

The NC series controller has a remote I/O connector which can connect to up to 8 extension
3
modules with 256 DI and 256 DO points. The pin assignment is as follows.
(1) Remote I/O connector (female); (2) Remote I/O connector (male)
Pin No. Function description

1 TX+
2 TX-
3 RX-
4 RX+
5 GND
6 SHIELD
Wiring diagram for remote I/O connector:

Remote I/O connector Remote I/O connector
on NC controller
1: TX+ 1: RX+
2: TX- 2: RX-
3: RX- 3: TX-
4: RX+ 4: TX+
5: GND 5: GND
6: SHIELD 6: SHIELD
3-22
There are two types of remote I/O module: opto-isolated type (NC-EIO-T3232) and relay type
(NC-EIO-R3216 / NC-EIO-R2010).
3
1. Opto-isolated type: NC-EIO-T3232
The opto-isolated type remote I/O module can connect to the NC controller using the RS-422
communication. Station numbers can be selected on the board and there is an offset of 32 points
for the I/O address of every additional station. Thus, the first station starts from X256 / Y256, the
second station starts from X288 / Y288, and so on. The controller can connect to up to 8 modules
with 256 DI and 256 DO points available.
2. Relay type: NC-EIO-R3216 / NC-EIO-R2010

The relay type remote I/O module can connect to the NC controller using the RS-422
communication. Station numbers can be selected on the board and there is an offset of 32 points
for the I/O address of every additional station. Thus, the first station starts from X256 / Y256 and
the second station starts from X288 / Y288. This module supports 32 DI and 16 DO points, so
the rest of the 16 DO points cannot be used, but the next station still has an offset of 32 points for
the Y address.
Wiring of remote I/O module:

COM- is for signal current and is prohibited from connecting to 24 VDC or 0V power. Switch to H
(PNP) or L (NPN) to select the signal type.
Wiring example for the button and mechanical switch:
PNP NPN
switch
switch
COM- COM- COM- COM-
I256 I257 I258 I259
3-23
Wiring example for the proximity switch of NPN two-wire system:
NPN two-wire system proximity switch
3 Brown
Direction of current
Blue
COM- COM- COM- COM-
I256 I257 I258 I259
Wiring example for the proximity switch of PNP two-wire system:
PNP two-wire system proximity switch
Blue
Brown
COM- COM- COM- COM-
I256 I257 I258 I259
Wring example for the proximity switch of NPN three-wire system:

NPN sensor
Brown DC +24V
Black NPN
Blue
COM- COM- COM-
I256 I257 I258
3-24
Wring example for the proximity switch of PNP three-wire system:
PNP sensor
3
0V Blue
PNP Black
Brown
Direction of current COM- COM- COM-
I256 I257 I258
3-25
3.11 Wiring for local I/O connector

The pin assignment for the local I/O connector of the NC200 series controllers is as follows.
3 Note: NC30E(H) series models do not have the local I/O connector.
(1) Local I/O connector (female); (2) Local I/O connector (male)
DI DO
Pin 1 X112 Pin 2 X113 Pin 1 Y112 Pin 2 Y113
Pin 3 X114 Pin 4 X115 Pin 3 Y114 Pin 4 Y115
Pin 5 X116 Pin 6 X117 Pin 5 Y116 - -
Pin 7 X118 Pin 8 X119
3-26
DI wiring; connects to an external power supply.

TB2
24 VDC
3
X115 ...
X114
X107
DO wiring; connects to an external power supply.

TB3
24 VDC
Y116 R ...
Y115
Y114
Y113
Y112
3-27
3-28
Table of Group Function
This chapter provides tables of group function for you to quickly view all of the functions
of the NC series controller.
4.1 Tables of group function ······································································4-2

4.2 Machine operation panel A - function of keys ········································· 4-11
4.3 Machine operation panel B - function of keys ········································· 4-13
4.4 Table of corresponding buttons (for OPENCNC models) ·························· 4-15
4-1
Table of Group Function Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual
4.1 Tables of group function

Available in all modes
POS
4
Layer 1 Layer 2 Layer 3 Layer 4
ABS - - -
CLR ALL - -
CLR X - -
REL
(the clear function of the CLR Y - -
corresponding axis is CLR Z - -
available only when you
CLR A - -
connect the axis)
CLR B - -
CLR C - -
MECH - - -
EDIT mode
PRG_File manage
COPY F - - -
PASTE - - -
DEL (file / folder) - - -
SEL TOGL / CANCEL - - -
ALL SEL TOGL / CANCEL - - -
File Manage - - -
NAME - -
SORT SIZE - -
DATE - -
NEW F - - -
FOLDER - - -
RENAME - - -
FIND F - - -
MERGE - - -
MACRO - - -
DXF - - -
GRA EDT - - -
INT MCR - - -
4-2
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Table of Group Function
EDIT mode
PRG_File edit
COPY - - -
PASTE
DEL
UNDO
B START
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
4
B END - - -
LABLE - - -
NEXT - -
PREV - -
STRING
REPLACE - -
Replace all - -
AUTO mode
PRG
Spindle speed (S) range: 0 - Pr409 setting range
SF SET
Feedrate (F) range: 0 - Pr318 setting range
SEARCH RUN - -
BARCODE LOAD - -
(set Pr10053 to enable CLR - -
this function) CLR ALL - -
FILE QUEUE Set Pr10045 to enable or disable this function.
File Manage - - -
JOG / MPG mode

PRG
SF SET
POSITION - -
LINEAR - -
P1 -
P2 -
TEACH CIRCULAR
P3 -
(set Pr10044 to enable this
function) PLANE -
DEL - -
SAVE - -
NEW FILE - -
MECH / ABS - -
4-3
MDI mode
PRG
LOAD - - -
4 HOME mode
SAVE
CLR
-
-
-
-
-
-
PRG
SF SET

OFS
ABS - -
INC - -
WEAR CLR ALL - -
CLR ONE - -
ABS / INC MODE Set Pr10059 to enable this function (1: Abs; 2: Inc).
ABS - -
INC - -
LEN OFST - -
OFFSET
ABS OFST - -
CLR ONE - -
ABS / INC MODE Set Pr10059 to enable this function (1: Abs; 2: Inc).
SET -
MAGA1
(functions in Layer 3 are RST ALL -
only available in JOG LOCK -
mode)
UNLOCK -
MAGA
SET -
MAGA2
(functions in Layer 3 are RST ALL -
only available in JOG LOCK -
mode)
UNLOCK -
LOCAL - -
GLOBAL - -
MACRO HOLD - -
(set Pr10045 to enable
this function) EXTEND - -
MECH WR _ (axis coordinate) -
ABS WR _ (axis coordinate) -
4-4
OFS
CLR REL -
CLR ALL -
4
SET L -
AUTO Point1
COORD SET L/2 Point2
SET
SET P -
ABS - -
INC - -

GRA
CENT SET - - -
WIN RST - - -
UP - -
DOWN - -
LEFT - -
RIGHT - -
WIN SET
ZM IN - -
ZM OUT - -
OK - -
CANCEL - -
PV(STEP) This function is only available in AUTO mode.
GRAPHIC - - -
PREVIEW This function is only available in AUTO mode.
CLEAR - - -

ALM
ALARM - - -
HISTORY CLR ALL - -
4-5

DGN
SET NR - -
4 PROCESS CLR TIME

CLR NR
-
-
DEL
US DEC
-
-
-
-
USR VAR HEX -
S DEC -
FLOAT -
USR VAR SYS VAR - -
DEL -
US DEC -
M VAR HEX -
S DEC -
FLOAT -
X -
Y -
M -
BIT
A -
T -
C -
T -
C(16) -
C(32) -
D -
MLC
V -
REG
Z -
US DEC -
HEX -
S DEC -
FLOAT -
US DEC -
HEX -
DEV MON
S DEC -
FLOAT -
4-6
DGN
LD -
LDI -
4
LDP -
LDF -
OUT -
APP -
— -
｜ -
DEL V-LN -
ADD LN -
DEL LN -
DEL -
LABEL -
TABLE -
X
Y
M
A
EDITOR T
(only available in EDIT
mode) C
SYMBOL
D
MLC P
I
DEL
COPY
PASTE
SAVE -
IMPORT IMPORT
EXPORT
NEW FILE
EXPORT NAME SR
SIZE SR
DATA SR
JUMP TO -
SELECT -
CUT -
COPY -
PASTE -
ON -
SET
(only available in EDIT OFF -
mode)
RUN / STP -
JUMP TO - -
4-7
DGN
SRV MON - -
I/O MON - -
4
SYS VAR -
SYS VAR -
CH VAR -
AXIS VAR -
SYS MON
IF VAR -
VAR MON MLC VAR -
US DEC -
BIN -
HEX -
S DEC -
SYSTEM - -
FW SN - -
STATUS
HW SN - -
M INFO DEL -
LOCK / UNLOCK
S SCP
SYS CHECK -
PWD CHG -
LOCK / UNLOCK -
RST U1 -
RST U2 -
M SCP
OK
FUN ENA CANCEL
DEFAULT
PWD
RESET -
PWD CHG -
U1 SCP
LOCK / UNLOCK -
PWD CHG -
U2 SCP
LOCK / UNLOCK -
SETTING -
RELEASE -
EXPIRE
PWD CHG
EXP SCP
LOCK / UNLOCK
4-8
DGN
NEXT AX - -
READ - -
4
COMPUTE - -
WR GAIN - -
WR Notch - -
TUNING RUN - -
(only available in JOG or
MPG mode) JOG← - -
(set Pr10045 to enable or
disable this function) JOG→ - -
POS1 - -
POS2 - -
TAP SET(1)
TAP RIV -
TAP SET(2)
SERVO READ -
TEXT WR Set Pr10045 to enable or disable this function.
IMPORT - -
IMPORT SEL ALL - -
CLR ALL - -
EXPORT - -
EXPORT SEL ALL - -
CLR ALL - -
LOGO WR Set Pr10045 to enable or disable this function.
4-9

PAR
PROCESS - - -
4 OPERATE
MAGA
SPINDLE
MACHINE
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
HOME - - -
ETH. DEFAULT - -
OK - -
um - -
COMP um+ - -
IMPORT - -
IMPORT+ - -
DEFAULT - -
SYSTEM
COLOR - -
DEFAULT - -
MLC
COLOR - -
DEFAULT - -
GRAPHIC
COLOR - -
SERVO READ - -
SEARCH - - -
CONFIG
(except AUTO and MDI OK - -
modes)
SET RIO
(except AUTO and MDI OK - -
modes)
SAVE - -
DEL GRP - -
WRT PAR - -
PAR GRP
RED PAR - -
SRT PAR - -
AVERAGE - -

SOFT
You can configure the panel screen with the ScreenEditor software for application needs.
4-10
4.2 Machine operation panel A - function of keys

Symbol Description Supported mode / group
The POS group key. Press to display the screen of
4
All modes and groups
coordinate setting.
The PRG group key. Press to display the screen

of program editing.
The OFS group key. Press to display the screen of

coordinate setting and tool offset setting.
The DGN group key. Press to display the screen

of diagnosis, system parameter, and system All modes and groups
status.
The ALM group key. Press to display the screen of

alarm display.
The GRA group key. Press to display the screen of

graphic display.
The PAR group key. Press to display the screen of

parameter setting.
The SOFT group key. Press to display the

configured panel screen.
Reset key All modes and groups
Axis position and command code keys PRG
Numeric keys (operation symbols) PRG, OFS, DGN
Decimal point key (operation symbol) PRG, OFS
Negative sign key (operation symbol) PRG, OFS
PAGE UP and PAGE DN (page down) keys PRG, OFS, DGN
Cursor keys (operation symbols) PRG, OFS, DGN
Home (end) key PRG
Space key PRG
4-11
Symbol Description Supported mode / group
Shift key PRG
4 Delete (insert) key
Back space key

PRG
PRG
Enter key PRG, OFS, DGN
Exit key PRG, DGN
Parentheses key PRG
Left and right function keys All modes and groups
Function keys All modes and groups
4-12
4.3 Machine operation panel B - function of keys

Symbol Description
4
Auto mode: for program execution
Edit mode: for file management and program editing
JOG mode: for manually operating the machine tool
MPG mode: for operating the axis direction of the machine tool with MPG
MDI mode: for simple program entering and execution
Home mode: for rapid homing to the machine origin
Single block execution: execute one single block at a time and then stop
Single block skip: skip one single block when there is a “/ ” symbol in the block
Optional stop: stop at the specified block if there is an M01 command in the
block
MPG simulation: during program execution, enable this function to control the
execution speed with MPG
Air blow switch
Coolant switch: coolant ON / coolant OFF
Limit cancellation: when the hardware limit is triggered, press this key to clear
the alarm
Light switch: light ON / light OFF
Rapid traverse mode: execute axis movement based on the set rapid override
X axis direction: in JOG mode, manually move the X axis towards positive or
negative direction
Y axis direction: in JOG mode, manually move the Y axis towards positive or
negative direction
Z axis direction: in JOG mode, manually move the Z axis towards positive or
negative direction
Rotation axis direction: in JOG mode, manually run the rotation axis in forward or
reverse direction
4-13
Symbol Description
Spindle forward: manually run the spindle in forward direction
4
Spindle stop: manually stop the spindle rotation
Spindle reverse: manually run the spindle in reverse direction
Feedrate / JOG override: increment / decrement

Feedrate / JOG
Rapid override: increment / decrement

Rapid override
Spindle override: increment / decrement

Spindle override
Chip discharge conveyor direction: motor runs in positive / negative direction
Tailstock center: forward / backward
Tool turret: clockwise / counterclockwise
Spindle hydraulic chuck: release / tighten
MPG magnification selection: X1, X10, X100
User-defined keys
4-14
4.4 Table of corresponding buttons (for OPENCNC models)

NC key PC keyboard Description
F1 - F8 (function keys) F1 - F8 Function keys
4
► (function key) Tab Next page (of the function bar)
◄ (function key) Ctrl + Tab Previous page (of the function bar)
POS Ctrl + F1 The POS group key
PRG Ctrl + F2 The PRG group key
OFS Ctrl + F3 The OFS group key
DGN Ctrl + F4 The DGN group key
ALM Ctrl + F5 The ALM group key
GRA Ctrl + F6 The GRA group key
PAR Ctrl + F7 The PAR group key
SOFT Ctrl + F8 The SOFT group key
Numeric keys Numeric keys -
Alphabetic keys Alphabetic keys -
Symbol keys Symbol keys -
Direction keys Direction keys -
PAGE UP / PAGE DN Page Up / Page Down -
BACK SPACE Backspace -
SPACE Space -
DEL / INS Delete / Insert -
SHIFT Shift -
HOME / END Home / End -
ENTER Enter -
EXIT Esc -
RESET Ctrl + Esc -
Help
- F12
(function descriptions for keys)
SHIFT + GRA PrtScn Screen capturing
4-15
4-16
Introduction to
NC System Modes
This chapter introduces the seven system modes supported by the NC controller.
5.1 Auto mode (AUTO) ············································································5-2

5.2 Program edit mode (EDIT)···································································5-2
5.3 Manual input mode (MDI) ····································································5-2
5.4 MPG mode (MPG) ·············································································5-2
5.5 Jog mode (JOG) ···············································································5-2
5.6 Rapid mode (RAPID) ·········································································5-3
5.7 Homing mode (HOME) ·······································································5-3
5.8 Group screen overview ·······································································5-4
5-1
Introduction to NC System Modes Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual
5.1 Auto mode (AUTO)

To execute a program, you have to open the file, switch the system to AUTO mode, and then
5
press CYCLE START. In this mode, you can verify the machining program, cutting conditions,
and position coordinates before execution as well as avoid unexpected execution by accidentally
pressing CYCLE START in other modes. This mode is only for program execution rather than
program editing or manual axis movement.
5.2 Program edit mode (EDIT)

You can edit a program in EDIT mode. In this mode, the editing functions in PRG group are
enabled for you to edit the program. In addition, program execution and manual axis movement
are not available in this mode.
5.3 Manual input mode (MDI)

In MDI mode, you can enter and execute a single block of program in the PRG group screen. In
this mode, you can enter up to 14 program blocks in the PRG screen. General program editing,
program execution, and manual axis operation are not available in this mode.
5.4 MPG mode (MPG)

In MPG mode, you can use the external MPG to manually operate the axes promptly and
accurately. Program editing, program execution, and jog operation are not available in this mode.
5.5 Jog mode (JOG)

In JOG mode, press the axis direction keys on machine operation panel B to have the axes jog.
Set the jog speed and moving distance with the JOG override key. You can move the work
platform in high speed with the rapid traverse override key and axis direction keys. The axis
moving speed is determined by the rapid override setting. Program execution and editing are not
available in this mode.
5-2
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Introduction to NC System Modes
5.6 Rapid mode (RAPID)

When in JOG mode, pressing RAPID during operation can switch the JOG speed to the set rapid
5
traverse override.
5.7 Homing mode (HOME)

In HOME mode, you can return the axes to the machine origin by simply pressing the
corresponding axis direction keys on machine operation panel B. After booting, you should set
the system to HOME mode to have each axis return to the machine origin before executing the
program. If you do not perform homing after booting, program execution is prohibited.
5-3
5.8 Group screen overview

A full range of information is provided on the screens of function groups of this controller.
5
The following introduces some functions in the group screens.
 POS group
(1) (2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(11)
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
Figure 5.8.1
(1) Name of current program (6) Current system mode
(2) Currently executed program line (7) Alarm display
(3) Current group function (8) Rapid traverse override
(4) Current coordinates (9) Feedrate override
(5) Machining information: (10) Spindle override
Spindle speed: command value (11) System status
Cutting feedrate: command value
Spindle load rate: %
Actual speed: rpm
Actual feedrate: mm/min
System time
Tool number (T)
Count of machining operations
Cutting time
(11) displays the current status of the system for your reference. There are 7 system statuses
with the display priority as follows: MLC stop > SV NO RDY (servo not ready) > Emg Stop
(emergency stop) > PROC (in progress) > RUN (in execution) > STOP (program stops) > Ready.
5-4
 PRG group
AUTO mode:
(1) (2)
5
(3)
(8)
(4)
(9)
(5)
(6) (7)
Figure 5.8.2
(1) Name of current program (8) F.act: actual feedrate per minute
(2) Currently executed program line M.act: actual feedrate per revolution
(3) Current group function S.act: actual spindle speed
(4) Currently executed program content T: tool number
(5) Coordinate information during F: feedrate (command value)
program execution M: feedrate per revolution (command value)
(6) Current system mode S: spindle speed
(7) Current override settings t: dwelll time
CYC: cycle time
(9) Current command status
5-5
EDIT mode:
5
(2)
(1)
Figure 5.8.3
(1) File list: displays folders and program files
(2) File information: displays the size and modification date and time of
the file or folder
(1)
Figure 5.8.4
(1) File content: displays the content of the program file
5-6
MDI mode
(1) (3)
5
(4)
(2)
Figure 5.8.5
(1) MDI program
(2) Information of cutting feedrate, feedrate per revolution, spindle speed, tool
number, and dwell time
(3) Coordinate information: absolute / residual coordinates
(4) Currently executed status commands
 OFS group
Coordinate information:
(2)
(1)
Figure 5.8.6
(1) Workpiece coordinate setting: offset coordinates, G54 - G59 coordinate
system
(2) Coordinate information: machine / relative / absolute coordinates
5-7
Tool Wear:
5
(1)
(3)
(4)
(2)
Figure 5.8.7
(1) Compensation number (3) Auxiliary display: coordinate system
(2) Input field for compensation data (4) Auxiliary display: illustration of tool tip type
Tool length (Tool Offset):
(1)
(3)
(4)
(2)
Figure 5.8.8
(1) Compensation number (3) Auxiliary display: coordinate system
(2) Input field for compensation data (4) Auxiliary display: illustration of tool tip type
5-8
 DGN group
Servo Tuning:
(1)
(4)
5
(5)
(2) (3)
Figure 5.8.9
(1) Servo parameter: number and name of servo parameters
(2) Results after gain tuning: displays the calculation results of auto tuning
(3) System settings: displays the currently used servo settings
(4) Positioning setting: position 1 / position 2
(5) Tuning conditions
MLC Operation / Edit:
(1)
(2)
Figure 5.8.10
(1) MLC program
(2) Input field for command name
5-9
 ALM group
(1)
5 (2)
(3)
Figure 5.8.11
(1) Alarm message
(2) Sequence of alarm occurrence
(3) Alarm code
5-10
 GRA Group
5
(1) (2)
Figure 5.8.12 Screen of setting Pr14003 to 0
(1)
(2)
Figure 5.8.13 Screen of setting Pr14003 to 1
(1) Path diagram: displays the program path
(2) Displays the program in execution, system information, and coordinate
information
5-11
5-12
Position (POS) group
The POS group displays the axes positions, which are represented in absolute, relative,
and machine coordinates.
6.1 Absolute coordinates ······················································································· 6-3
6.2 Relative coordinates ························································································ 6-3
6.3 Machine coordinates ······················································································· 6-3
6-1
Position (POS) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual
POS group displays the axes positions, which are represented in absolute, relative, and machine
coordinates. It can display the coordinates of up to three linear axes and one rotation axis
according to the axis setting.
6 Note: bold function names in a box (such as POS) mean the keys on machine operation panel A; bold
function names (such as CLR ALL) mean the function keys of F1 - F6.
(1) (2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(11)
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
(1) Name of current program (6) Current system mode
(2) Currently executed program line (7) Alarm display
(3) Current group function (8) Rapid traverse override
(4) Current coordinates (9) Feedrate override
(5) Machining information: (10) Spindle override
Spindle speed: command value (11) System status
Cutting feedrate: command value
Spindle load rate: %
Actual speed: rpm
Actual feedrate: mm/min
System time
Tool number (T)
Count of machining operations
Cutting time
6-2
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Posiion (POS) Group
6.1 Absolute coordinates

Absolute coordinates refer to the program origin of G-code, which you can use to check whether
6
the movement specified in a program block is identical to the actual movement. The operation
steps are as follows.
(1) Press POS to display the POS group screen and the available functions include absolute
coordinates (ABS), relative coordinates (REL), and machine coordinates (MECH).
(2) Press ABS to enter the absolute coordinate screen.
6.2 Relative coordinates

Relative coordinates indicate the moving distance from the origin. The operation steps are as
follows.
(2) Press REL to enter the relative coordinate screen.
(3) The functions available in the 2nd layer function bar include:
CLR ALL: clear the relative coordinate values of all axes.
CLR X: clear the relative coordinate value of X axis.
CLR Y: clear the relative coordinate value of Y axis.
CLR Z: clear the relative coordinate value of Z axis.
CLR A: clear the relative coordinate value of A axis.
CLR B: clear the relative coordinate value of B axis.
CLR C (next page): clear the relative coordinate value of C axis.
Note: the clear functions for the axes (X, Y, Z, A, B, and C) are available only when you connect the axes.
6.3 Machine coordinates

Machine coordinates are defined according to the mechanism. The coordinate data is neither
removable nor changeable due to the selected workpiece coordinate system. The operation
(2) Press MECH to enter the machine coordinate screen.
6-3
Position (POS) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual
6-4
Program (PRG) group
The PRG group provides functions of file management and program editing for G-code
and macro files. In addition, some functions are specific to particular system modes.
7
7.1 Ethernet setting ·················································································7-3
7.2 Create a new file (NEW F) ···································································7-8
7.3 Copy files (COPY F) ···········································································7-9
7.4 Paste files (PASTE)············································································7-9
7.5 Delete (delete files and directories) ······················································ 7-10
7.6 Select / cancel selection of multiple files (SEL TOGL / CANCEL & ALL SEL TOGL
/ CANCEL) ··················································································· 7-10
7.7 Rename files (RENAME) ··································································· 7-12
7.8 Create directories (FOLDER) ····························································· 7-13
7.9 Search for files (FIND F) ··································································· 7-14
7.10 File merging (MERGE) ···································································· 7-14
7.11 Sequencing (SORT) ······································································· 7-15
7.12 Convert DXF files ··········································································· 7-16
7.13 Macro files···················································································· 7-17
7.14 File editing (File edit) ······································································ 7-17
7.14.1 Line search (LABEL) ······························································· 7-18
7.14.2 String search (STRING) ··························································· 7-18
7.14.3 Edit a section of program (B START / B END)······························· 7-20
7.14.4 Delete (lines and blocks) ·························································· 7-21
7.14.5 Copy (lines and blocks) and paste ············································· 7-21
7.14.6 Undo ··················································································· 7-21
7.15 Graphic edit (lathe system) ······························································ 7-22
7.15.1 Objective ·············································································· 7-22
7.15.2 Project management ······························································· 7-22
7.15.3 Description of graphic edit procedures for lathe system ·················· 7-25
7.15.4 Operation steps for graphic programming ···································· 7-45
7.16 Program function in other modes ······················································· 7-47
7-1
Program (PRG) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual
You can manage and edit G-code and macro files with PRG group functions. File manage
includes three layers: (1) CF (CF card), INTER (internal memory), USB (USB disk), and
NETWORK; (2) folders and G-code files; (3) G-code files.
7 Some specific functions are available in particular system modes. For example, you can use the
function of break line search in AUTO mode or you can enter and execute a program in MDI
mode.
Note: bold function names in a box (such as POS) mean the keys on machine operation panel A; bold
(1) (2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(1) Name of current program (4) Disk options
(2) Currently executed program line (5) Current system mode
(3) Current group function
Set the system to EDIT mode and press PRG on machine operation panel A to display the PRG
screen. In the File manage screen, you can press and or PAGE UP and PAGE DN to
move the cursor, press ENTER to enter the second or third layer, and then select a G-code file.
After selecting the G-code file, press ENTER to open the file and enter the edit screen. Press
and (scroll the screen up or down by 1 line), and PAGE UP and PAGE DN (scroll the
screen up or down by 20 lines) to display the file content.
Note: the suggested specifications for the USB disk is as follows.
USB disk specification

Disk format FAT32
Disk capacity As required
7-2
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Program (PRG) Group
7.1 Ethernet setting

You can use Ethernet to connect to the PC to enable remote communication. You can use the
7
CNCNetwork software to manage the online files of multiple NC controllers with one PC,
enabling data sharing and file management with the PC, and transmission-along-with-machining
(DNC).
Set the communication protocol between the NC system and PC by referring to Section 12.7.1
before using the network function. The following gives simple instructions.
Set the protocol of the NC system by going to PAR > ETH..
Figure 7.1.1
Network setting parameter

Number Name Setting range or format
Character length: 1 - 8
10030 Host name
Actual setting: 1 - 8 characters
Character length: ×××．×××．×××．×××
10031 IP address
Actual setting: 192．168．0．2
10032 Subnet mask
10033 Default gateway
10034 Network function switch
Actual setting: 1
10035 DHCP switch
Actual setting: 0
10036 Remote PC IP address 1
Character length: ×××． ×××． ×××． ×××
7-3
Network setting parameter

Number Name Setting range or format
7
Shared remote directory IP Character length: 0 - 5
10041
address Actual setting: 0
Set the protocol of PC by setting Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties on the PC operating
system (as shown in Figure 7.1.2) or going to CNCNetwork > Options.
Network setting on PC:
Figure 7.1.2
Steps:
(1) Select the check box for Use the following IP address and enter the following in
sequence:
IP address: 192 . 168 . 0 . 1
Subnet mask: 255 . 255 . 255 . 0
(2) Click OK to finish the setting.
7-4
Network settings with CNCNetwork:
Figure 7.1.3
Steps:
(1) Execute CNCNetwork software and go to Options screen.
(2) Click Search CNC to connect to the CNC with the above settings.
7-5
DNC operation:
Execute CNCNetwork, open the file to be shared in the File Sharing screen, and then you can
7
execute the G-code file while it is being processed (DNC operation) using Ethernet.
No additional disk space is required for file storage as only the path of the shared files is
recorded. The connection steps are as follows.
(1) Use Ethernet communication to set the Internet connection between PC and NC.
(2) Execute CNCNetwork.
(3) Click the DNC tab.
Figure 7.1.4
(4) Set the system to EDIT mode and go to File manage > NETWORK.
Figure 7.1.5
(5) The screen displays the shared files. Select and open the G-code file that has been set to
be shared.
(6) Set the system to AUTO mode, press CYCLE START, and the system executes the G-code
file by DNC operation. The execution method is the same as that for general files.
7-6
(7) During DNC operation, file information is displayed in the DNC screen of CNCNetwork.
The information includes name of the connecting system, name of the file that executes
DNC, total number of lines, number of line being executed, and file content (the content is
scrolled down along with the execution progress, as shown in Figure 7.1.6).
Figure 7.1.6
7-7
7.2 Create a new file (NEW F)

In EDIT mode, you can use this function to create a new G-code file from the controller
7
interface. The operation steps are as follows.
(1) Set the system to EDIT mode.
(2) Press PRG to switch to the PRG screen.
(3) In the File manage screen, press and or PAGE UP and PAGE DN to move the
cursor to the destination of the disk for file creation (for example, the 2nd or 3rd layer of CF or
USB directory).
(4) Press to display the function bar on the next page.
(5) Press NEW F and a dialog box appears for you to enter the file name.
(6) Enter alphanumeric characters (no symbols) in the dialog box, press ENTER, and a new
file is created.
File format specifications

No restrictions on the format of main program names (names
Format of machining file name of each file should be unique in the same directory)
(G-code)
O + 0001 to 8999 (subprograms)
Format of macro file name
O + 9000 to 9999
(O macro)
Suffix ‘-’ and alphanumeric characters in sequence to the file
Remarks in file name
name
Valid format of filename extension .NC .ANC .CNC .PIM .TAP .PTP .UOO .DEMO
Format of M macro file name M + 10000 to 29999
Format of G macro file name G + 30000 to 49999
Maximum allowable character
31
length of file name
Storage location 2nd or 3rd management layer
Invalid symbols in file name ＊／＼ ∣ ＜＞？ “ ﹕
Note:
1. Names of each file should be unique in the same directory. For example, O0001 and O1 are regarded
as the same.
2. The File manage screen only displays general machining files. Macro files can be displayed by setting
the parameter Pr50 Macro file display.
3. Multiple dots can be used in the file name of a G-code file whereas the last one should come with a
valid format of file extension, such as “1.1.1.1.NC”.
7-8
7.3 Copy files (COPY F)

You can use this function to copy the existing files from all disk drives. The operation steps are
7
as follows.
cursor to the destination of the disk for file copying (for example, the 2 nd or 3rd layer of CF or
USB directory).
(4) Move the cursor to the file to be copied.
(5) Press COPY F and then PASTE to validate the execution.
7.4 Paste files (PASTE)
As described in Section 7.3, you should use this function together with the copy function to
complete file copying. It is one of the functions of File manage in PRG group. The operation
steps follow the descriptions in Section 7.3.
(1) Press and or PAGE UP and PAGE DN to move the cursor to the location of the disk,
directory, or layer for pasting the file.
(2) Enter the directory, press PASTE, and a dialog box appears for you to enter the file name.
Enter a new file name or follow the original one, and press ENTER to complete the
execution of file copying and pasting.
Note:
1. The specification of file naming for this function is the same as that of the file creation function. That is,
file names of each file should be unique.
2. If you do not execute COPY F before using the PASTE function, an error dialog box appears to
remind you to copy a file first, and thus the paste execution is invalid.
3. Follow the same operation steps to copy the files from the USB disk to the CF card.
7-9
7.5 Delete (delete files and directories)

You can use this function to delete the G-code files and directories in the second layer of File
7
manage.
The operation steps are as follows.
(3) In the File Manage screen, press and or PAGE UP and PAGE DN to move the
cursor, and press ENTER to enter the second or third layer of the disk.
(4) Move the cursor to the directory or file to be deleted.
(5) Press DEL and a dialog box appears for you to confirm the execution. Enter “Y” and press
ENTER to delete.
Note: the file or directory cannot be recovered once being deleted.
7.6 Select / cancel selection of multiple files (SEL TOGL /

CANCEL & ALL SEL TOGL / CANCEL)
In addition to copying or deleting a single file, you can use SEL TOGL / CANCEL to select or
cancel the selection of multiple files for copying, pasting, or deleting the files. The operation
steps for copying and pasting multiple files are as follows.
(3) Enter the directory where you desire to select the files.
cursor to the file to be selected. To select a file, press SEL TOGL (as shown in Figure
7.6.1). To cancel the selection, press CANCEL. To select all files, press ALL SEL TOGL.
To cancel the selection of all files, press CANCEL.
Figure 7.6.1
7-10
(5) After completing the selection, press COPY F.

(6) Go to another directory and press PASTE to paste the selected files, as shown in Figure
7.6.2.
Figure 7.6.2
The operation steps for deleting multiple files are as follows.

(3) Enter the directory where you desire to select the files.
cursor to the file to be selected. To select a file, press SEL TOGL. To cancel the selection,
press CANCEL.
(5) After selecting multiple files, press DEL, and a dialog box appears for you to confirm the
execution (as shown in Figure 7.6.3). Enter “Y” and press ENTER to delete.
Figure 7.6.3
7-11
Note:
1. After copying multiple files, you should paste them to another directory. If you paste the files in the
same directory, a dialog box appears to remind you to select another directory, and the execution is
7 2.
invalid.
When the names of the files to be pasted are identical to those of the original files, a dialog box
appears for you to decide whether to overwrite the original files. Enter “Y” to replace the original files
with the new ones; enter “N” or press EXIT to keep the original files.
7.7 Rename files (RENAME)

You can use this function to rename the file after creating the file. The operation steps are as
follows.
cursor to the destination of the disk (for example, the 2 nd or 3rd layer of CF or USB
directory).
(5) Move the cursor to the file to be renamed, press RENAME, and a dialog box appears for
you to enter the file name.
(6) Enter a name that is not identical to the file names in the directory, and press ENTER to
complete renaming the file.
Note:
1. You can only create G-code files in the 2nd and 3rd layers of File manage but not in the 1st layer.
2. The format specification of file name for file renaming is the same as that of file creation. If you enter a
name that is already used for another file in the directory when renaming, an error dialog box appears,
and the execution is invalid.
7-12
7.8 Create directories (FOLDER)

This function is for creating a directory for G-code files in the 2nd layer of File manage, which
7
is only available in the 2nd layer of File manage. Accordingly, the 2nd layer of File manage
can contain both directories and G-code files. The operation steps are as follows.
(4) In the 2nd layer of File manage, press FOLDER, and a dialog box appears for you to enter
the directory name.
Figure 7.8.1
(5) After entering the directory name, press ENTER to complete creating the directory.
By following the steps above, you can create a new directory in the 2nd layer of File manage,
and create and edit G-code files in this directory (the 3rd layer).
Directory format specifications

Format of directory name Not limited to alphanumeric characters
Maximum number of characters of directory name 31
Storage location 2nd management layer
7-13
7.9 Search for files (FIND F)

You can use this function to quickly search for the target file by file name and open it when there
7
are a number of G-code files. The operation steps are as follows.
cursor, and press ENTER to enter the 2nd or 3rd layer of the disk.
(5) Press FIND F and a dialog box appears for you to enter the file name to be searched. After
entering the file name, press ENTER to search for and open the file.
Note:
1. You can only search for files in the same directory with this function.
2. Enter the complete file name to accurately search for and open the file.
7.10 File merging (MERGE)

You can use this function with the file copying function to merge the program content of two
different G-code files. The operation steps are as follows.
(4) Select the G-code file to be copied.
(5) Press COPY F and the content is saved to the system’s clipboard.
(6) Move the cursor to the directory which contains files to be merged.
(8) Press MERGE and a dialog box appears for you to enter the name of the merged file. After
entering the name, press ENTER to open the file.
(9) Move the cursor to the line where you desire to paste the program content, and press
PASTE.
(10) To save the merged file, switch to different system modes, open another file, or press
RESET.
7-14
7.11 Sequencing (SORT)

This function is for sequencing the directories or files in a directory by a specified order,
7
facilitating the operation of file search or management.
(5) Press SORT to display the function bar in the 2nd layer.
(6) Press NAME, and the directories and files are displayed by the sequence of number >
English letters (from top to bottom). Press NAME again, and they are displayed by the
sequence of English letters > number (from top to bottom).
(7) Press SIZE to display the directories and files by the file size from small to large (from top to
bottom). Press SIZE again to display them by the file size from large to small (from top to
bottom).
(8) Press DATE to display the directories and files by the date from most recent to earlier (from
top to bottom). Press DATE again to display them by the date from earlier to most recent
(from top to bottom).
7-15
7.12 Convert DXF files
You can find this function from the function bar in the File manage screen. After selecting the
7 DXF file, enter relevant parameter settings to convert them into an executable G-code file.

(3) Press twice to display the function bar on the third page.
(4) Press DXF to display the DXF file manage screen.

cursor, and press ENTER to select the DXF file to be converted.
(6) After selecting the DXF file, you are redirected to the screen for setting the relevant
parameters, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 7.12.1
(7) After finishing setting the parameters, press Transform, and a dialog box appears for
you to enter the new file name.
(8) After entering the file name, press ENTER to convert the DXF file into a G-code file, and
the G-code file is stored in the CF directory.
(9) Then, you can execute the G-code file in AUTO mode.
7-16
7.13 Macro files

In response to the application requirements, this function is for managing the equipment-specific
7
macro files. Upon accessing the security authorization, you can use all the editing functions
described in Section 7.14. Otherwise, you can only browse the existing macro files rather than
open and edit them. Contact the local distributor for authorization settings.
7.14 File editing (File edit)

You can use this function to modify or delete the content of the G-code files. After you open the
file in the File manage screen, the system switches to the File edit screen. Move the cursor to
any position in the program and use the alphabetic, numeric, and editing keys on machine
operation panel A to edit the program. To save the file after editing the program, switch to
different system modes, press RESET, or open another file. The operation steps for entering
the File edit screen are as follows.
(3) Press and or PAGE UP and PAGE DN to move the cursor, and press ENTER to
enter the 2nd or 3rd layer of the disk.
(4) Select the G-code file to be edited, and press ENTER to open the file and enter the edit
screen.
(5) Press , , , and to move the cursor to any position in the program.
(6) Edit the content by pressing the alphabetic, numeric, and editing keys on machine operation
panel A.
(7) To save the file after finishing editing, switch to different system modes, open another file, or
press RESET.
Specifications for editing

Maximum number of characters of a single line 255
Supported mode EDIT mode
Allowable file size Below 3 MB
Note:
1. When using the File manage or File edit function, you have to set the system to EDIT mode to display
the corresponding function bar. Otherwise, the PRG screen is only for viewing the currently opened
program file and displays the coordinate information.
2. You can insert “( )” (parentheses) at the end of each program block in the G-code file for making
notes. Do not insert parentheses in the beginning of the program block, or the block may be taken as
a note and be skipped.
7-17
7.14.1 Line search (LABEL)
This function is for searching the specific line of program in the G-code file. The operation steps
7
are as follows.
screen.
(6) Press LABEL and a dialog box appears for you to enter the line number (by pressing the
numeric keys 0 - 9).
(7) After entering the line number, press ENTER, and the cursor jumps to the specified line,
completing the action.
Requirements for line search

Maximum number of characters of
62
searching string
Format of searching string Specific line of the program
7.14.2 String search (STRING)
The line search function is only for searching the specific line while you can use this function to
search for specific strings. The accuracy of the searching result depends on how precise the
input string is. The string search function contains the function of string replacing. You can
determine whether to replace a string when searching for a string, which enables you to directly
replace the string on the panel screen. The operation steps are as follows.
(4) Select the G-code file to be edited, press ENTER to open the file and enter the edit screen.
7-18
(6) Press STRING and a dialog box appears for you to enter the string to be searched, as
shown in the following figure.
Figure 7.14.2.1
(7) After entering the string to be searched and the string to be replaced, press ENTER to
search the string.
(8) After that, the searched string is highlighted. At the same time, “NEXT”, “PREV”,
“REPLACE”, and “Replace all” are displayed on the function bar.
(9) Press NEXT to search the next match or press PREV to search the previous match.
(10) Press REPLACE when you desire to replace one single string. You can press Replace all
to batch replace the matches with the new string.
(11) Press to exit the string search function and go back to the function bar of File edit.
(12) After replacing the string, ensure to save the results (by switching to different system
modes, opening another file, or pressing RESET).
Requirements for string replacing

Supported mode EDIT mode
Allowable file size for editing and replacing Below 3 MB
7-19
7.14.3 Edit a section of program (B START / B END)
To edit a section of a program, you can use the B START / B END functions to specify the start
7
and end of the content to be edited. Then, you can delete, copy, and paste the selected
program content as required, which simplified the editing process. The operation steps are as
follows.
(4) Select the G-code file to be edited, press ENTER to open the file and enter the edit screen.
(5) Press , , , and to move the cursor to the start of the section to be edited and
press B START.
(6) Move the cursor to the end of the section to be edited and press B END. See the following
figure for the screen for the selected section.
Figure 7.14.3.1
(7) Follow Steps (5) - (6) then press DEL, and you can delete the selected content.
(8) Follow Steps (5) - (6) then press COPY to copy the selected content. Move the cursor to
where you wish to paste the copied content and press PASTE to insert the content.
7-20
7.14.4 Delete (lines and blocks)
You can use this function to delete a single line of program where the cursor is located. And you
7
can use this function with B START and B END to delete a whole section of the program. The
operation steps are as follows.
screen.
(5) Move the cursor to the line to be deleted and press DEL to delete the line of program.
(6) Follow Step (7) in Section 7.14.3 to delete a whole section of a program.
7.14.5 Copy (lines and blocks) and paste
Move the cursor to the specified line and press COPY, which takes effect when used with
the PASTE function. You can use this function to copy a single line or a section of the
program content. The operation steps are as follows.

screen.
(5) Move the cursor to the line of program to be copied and press COPY.
(6) Move the cursor to the position to paste the copied content, and press PASTE to paste
the line of program to that position.
(7) Follow Step (8) in Section 7.14.3 to copy a whole section of a program.
7.14.6 Undo
During program editing, use this function to undo the previous edit. You can repeatedly use
this function for undoing up to 7 previous steps. The operation steps are as follows.

screen.
(4) After editing the program, press UNDO to undo the previous edit.
7-21
7.15 Graphic edit (lathe system)

7.15.1 Objective
7
This function provides an interface with graphics for you to select the machining procedure and
enter relevant machining parameters to generate a tool path program, which replaces manual
programming and calculation as well as planning the machining path with CAM.
7.15.2 Project management
(1) (2)
Previous Next
(1) Project Management screen; (2) Process Management screen
 Add a new project (ADD PRJ)

Enter the Graphic edit screen, press ADD PRJ, and a dialog box appears. Enter the file name
and press ENTER to add a new project file with the filename extension as .DLC. You can
repeatedly use the project file. Simply open the .DLC project file in the Project Management
screen, and you can get all the previously set procedures, and modify or export the machining
program.
If you press ADD PRJ in the Process Management screen, a dialog box appears to remind you
to return to the Project Management screen. Press to continue the operation.
7-22
 Add a new procedure (ADD PRC)
Open a project file before you add a new procedure. If no project file is selected, a dialog box
7
displaying “Please open a file!” appears when you press ADD PRC.
Select a project file and press ENTER to enter its corresponding Process Management screen.
The system automatically generates two default machining procedures for each created project
file, INITIAL and FINISH, which start and end the program respectively. You can add or modify
procedures between them.
If you desire to select another project file, press to exit the Process Management screen.
 Delete (DEL)
Press this key to delete the selected project file or procedure, except INITIAL and FINISH. Move
the cursor to the project file or procedure to be deleted, press DEL, and a dialog box appears.
Enter “Y” to confirm the deletion.
 Copy and paste (COPY & PASTE)
These two functions are for copying and pasting the project file or procedure. Move the cursor
to the file to be copied, press COPY and then PASTE, and a dialog box appears. Enter the new
file name and press ENTER to complete the action.
 Convert a file (CONVERT)
Press this key to convert the selected .DLC project file into an .NC file. After converting, the
system automatically returns to the Program Management screen.
Important:
(1) If you press CONVERT without selecting the disk type in the File manage screen, a dialog
box appears to remind you to return to the File manage screen. Press to return to the
screen and select the disk for storing the file before you start the conversion.
(2) Select a .DLC file and press ENTER to open that file. If no project file is selected, a dialog
box displaying “Please open one DLC file!” appears.
 Sequencing (MOVE UP & MOVE DN)
The two functions are only available in the Process Management screen. Select a project file,
enter its corresponding Process Management screen, move the cursor to the procedure which
you desire to change its sequence, and then press MOVE UP or MOVE DN to change its
sequence. Note that this function cannot change the sequence of INITIAL and FINISH.
7-23
 Rename (RENAME)
Press this key to rename the selected project file or procedure, except INITIAL and FINISH.
7
Move the cursor to the project file or procedure to be renamed, press RENAME, and a dialog
box appears. Enter the file name and press ENTER to change the file name.
 Default (DFT INIT & DFT FNIH)
Press DFT INIT to change the default content of INITIAL. Press DFT FNIH to change the default
content of FINISH. The changed content of INITIAL and FINISH will be displayed in the project
that is added next time. The content of the existing projects remains unchanged.
7-24
7.15.3 Description of graphic edit procedures for lathe system
Sorting of currently available procedures
7
1. External step turning
[EX_STEP]
2. Internal step turning
Step turning
[IN_STEP]
3. Face step turning
[FC_STEP]
1. External taper turning

[EX_TAPER]
Taper turning
2. Internal taper turning
[IN_TAPER]
1. External threading
[EX_THRD]
Threading 2. Internal threading
[IN_THRD]
Graphic edit for 1. External grooving

lathe [EX_GRV]
2. Internal grooving
Grooving
[IN_GRV]
3. Face grooving
[FC_GRV]
1. Outer convex turning

[EX_ROUT]
2. Inner convex turning
[IN_ROUT]
Arc turning
3. Outer concave turning
[EX_RIN]
4. Inner concave turning
[IN_RIN]
1. External profile turning

[EX_PROF]
Profile turning
2. Internal profile turning
[IN_PROF]
7-25
 External step turning [EX_STEP]
(1) (3)
(2)
(4)
(1) Input fields for coordinates of each step point

Item Description Item Description
1st point X1_, Z1_ 2nd point X2_, Z2_
3rd point X3_, Z3_ 4th point X4_, Z4_
These 8 input fields are for setting the three-step contour machining. If the application
requires less than three steps, you can leave the fields of items in blue blank. To delete the
values in the input fields, press BACK SPACE or DEL and then press ENTER to confirm.
Refer to section (4) in the above figure for the position of each point.
(2) Parameter settings for contour machining

Tx_ X-coordinate of tool change position Tz_ Z-coordinate of tool change position
Feeding amount of rough turning Cutting mode setting
Ud_ Wm_
(absolute coordinate of X axis) (0 = rough & finish; 1 = rough; 2 = finish)
Allowance of finish turning Allowance of finish turning
Rdx_ Rdz_
(absolute coordinate of X axis) (absolute coordinate of Z axis)
Coolant switch
M_ Sx, Sz Safety clearance (coordinates)
(8 = on; 9 = off)
 The input values for Ud, Rdx, and Rdz must be greater than 0.
 Wm is for setting the cutting mode. Set Wm to 0 to perform a complete turning process
including rough and finish turning. Set Wm to 1 to perform rough turning and keep the
allowance of finish turning. Set Wm to 2 to perform finish turning once according to the
given path.
 Tx and Tz are for setting the tool change position. After finishing a machining
procedure, the system moves the tool to the position specified by Tx and Tz to perform
tool change for the next machining procedure.
7-26
(3) Parameter settings for tool compensation, tool nose radius compensation, speed, and
feedrate
T_
F_
Tool number + tool compensation
number
Format: TXXXX
Axis feedrate
G70_T
G70_F
Tool for executing G70 Finish turning
cycle
Feedrate for executing G70 Finish

7
Unit: mm/min or mm/rev turning cycle
Tool nose compensation
G92_ Maximum spindle speed G_
(40 = disabled; 41 = left; 42 = right)
Spindle speed control mode
G_ S_ Spindle speed
(G96 = constant; G97 = fixed)
Spindle control
M_ - -
(3 = forward; 4 = reverse; 5 = stop)
 T is for selecting the machining tool. Enter numbers in this field with the first two (or
the first one if the number is a one-digit number) as the tool number and the last two
as the compensation number. As shown in the figure above, 303 means tool No.3 is
used and tool compensation No.3 is enabled.
 G70_T is for specifying the tool number for executing G70 Finish turning cycle. The
format is the same as that for item T.
 G70_F is for specifying the tool feedrate for executing G70 Finish turning cycle.
 Tool nose compensation (G_): G40 / G41 / G42

G40 means the function is disabled, G41 is tool nose radius compensation left, and
G42 is tool nose radius compensation right. You have to fill the correct tool nose type
and tool radius value in the tool compensation table before using this function.
 Spindle speed control mode (G_): G96 / G97

Set this field to G96 to enable constant surface speed control and the S field is for
setting the cutting speed in the unit of m/min or feed/min.
Set this field to G97 to enable fixed spindle speed control and the S field is for setting
the speed per minute in the unit of rpm.
 G92 is for setting the maximum spindle speed. If the command speed exceeds this
setting, the spindle runs with this setting.
(4) Illustration
7-27
 Internal step turning [IN_STEP]
(1) (3)
(2)
(4)
(1) Input fields for coordinates of each step point (You can leave the fields of items in blue
blank, which means the points do not exist.)

Ud_ Wm_
Rdx_ Rdz_
Coolant switch
(8 = on; 9 = off)
feedrate
number Tool for executing G70 Finish turning
T_ G70_T
cycle
Format: TXXXX
Axis feedrate Feedrate for executing G70 Finish turning
F_ G70_F
Unit: mm/min or mm/rev cycle
Tool nose radius compensation
G_ S_ Spindle speed
Spindle control
M_ - -
(4) Illustration
7-28
 Face step turning [FC_STEP]
(1) (3)
(2)
(4)

Ud_ Wm_
Rdx_ Rdz_
Coolant switch Sx,
M_ Safety clearance (coordinates)
(8 = on; 9 = off) Sz
feedrate
number Tool for executing G70 Finish turning
T_ G70_T
cycle
Format: TXXXX
Axis feedrate Feedrate for executing G70 Finish
F_ G70_F
Unit: mm/min or mm/rev turning cycle
Tool nose radius compensation
G_ S_ Spindle speed
Spindle control
M_ - -
(4) Illustration
7-29
 External taper turning [EX_TAPER]
(1) (3)
7
(4)
(2)
3rd point X3_, Z3_ Ad Taper angle

Cutting mode setting
Feeding amount of rough turning
Ud_ Wm_ (0 = rough & finish; 1 = rough;
(absolute coordinate of X axis)
2 = finish)
Taper type
Rd_ Allowance of finish turning Kd_
(0 = XZ; 1 = XA; 2 = ZA)
Coolant switch
(8 = on; 9 = off)
Kd: taper type
0: XZ type 1: XA type 2: ZA type
feedrate
Refer to [EX_STEP] for the parameter settings in section (3).
(4) Illustration
7-30
 Internal taper turning [IN_TAPER]
(1) (3)
7
(4)
(2)
3rd point X3_, Z3_ Ad Taper angle

Ud_ Wm_
Taper type
Rd_ Allowance of finish turning Kd_
(0 = XZ; 1 = XA; 2 = ZA)
Coolant switch
(8 = on; 9 = off)
Kd: taper type
0: XZ type 1: XA type 2: ZA type
feedrate
(4) Illustration
7-31
 External threading [EX_THRD]
(1) (3)
7
(4)
(2)

0 = thread lead
A Thread angle L/TPI
1 = number of threads per inch
Unit for L/TPI
H Total thread cutting depth L L = thread lead in the unit of mm/pitch
TPI = number of threads per inch
Threading infeed
N Number of threads Lm
0: right; 1: middle; 2: left; 3: right-left shift

Ud_ Depth of the first cut mt Number of finish cutting
Qd_ Minimum cutting depth Rd_ Allowance of finish turning
Coolant switch
(8 = on; 9 = off)
 Ud is for specifying the depth of the first cut. Depth of the n cut (n >= 2) is
automatically calculated by the system with the formula Ud [√𝑛 − √(𝑛 − 1)] .
 Qd is for specifying the minimum cutting depth. When the cutting amount of the n cut
is smaller than the amount set by Qd, the system sets the value of Qd as the feed
amount.
 Rd is the allowance of finish turning and mt is the number of finish turning, so the
amount of each finish turning is Rd/mt.
feedrate
(4) Illustration
7-32
 Internal threading [IN_THRD]
(1) (3)
7
(4)
(2)

0 = thread lead
A Thread angle L/TPI
1 = number of threads per inch
Unit for L/TPI
H Total thread cutting depth L L = thread lead in the unit of mm/pitch
TPI = number of threads per inch
Threading infeed
N Number of threads Lm
0: right; 1: middle; 2: left; 3: right-left shift

Ud_ Depth of the first cut mt Number of finish cutting
Qd_ Minimum cutting depth Rd_ Allowance of finish turning
Coolant switch
(8 = on; 9 = off)
 Ud is for specifying the depth of the first cut. Depth of the n cut (n >= 2) is
automatically calculated by the system with the formula Ud [√𝑛 − √(𝑛 − 1)].
 Qd is for specifying the minimum cutting depth. When the cutting amount of the n cut
is smaller than the amount set by Qd, the system sets the value of Qd as the feed
amount.
 Rd is the allowance of finish turning and mt is the number of finish turning, so the
amount of each finish turning is Rd/mt.
feedrate
(4) Illustration
7-33
 External grooving [EX_GRV]
(1) (3)
7
(4)
(2)

Tw Groove width - -

X axis feeding amount of each peck Cutting mode setting
Ud_ Cm_
turning (0 = peck; 1 = straight; 2 = finish)
Retraction amount of Z axis after
Qd_ Z axis feeding amount of each cut Rd_ the cutting in X-axis direction is
finished
Coolant switch Retraction amount of X axis after
M_ Re_
(8 = on; 9 = off) each peck turning
Sx, Sz Safety clearance (coordinates) - -
 The input values for Ud, Qd, and Rd must be greater than 0.
 Cm is for setting the cutting mode. Set Cm to 0 to have the system perform peck
turning. Set Cm to 1 to perform straight cutting. Set Cm to 2 to perform finish turning
once according to the given path.
feedrate
(4) Illustration
7-34
 Internal grooving [IN_GRV]
(1) (3)
7
(4)
(2)

Tw Groove width - -

X axis feeding amount of each peck Cutting mode setting
Ud_ Cm_
Retraction amount of Z axis after
Qd_ Z axis feeding amount of each cut Rd_ the cutting in X-axis direction is
finished
Coolant switch Retraction amount of X axis after
M_ Re_
 The input values for Ud, Qd, and Rd must be greater than 0.
feedrate
(4) Illustration
7-35
 Face grooving [FC_GRV]
(1) (3)
7
(4)
(2)

Tw Groove width - -

Z axis Feeding amount of each peck Cutting mode setting
Wd_ Cm_
Retraction amount of X axis after
Qd_ X axis Feeding amount of each cut Rd_ the cutting in Z-axis direction is
finished
Coolant switch Retraction amount of Z axis after
M_ Re_
 The input values for Wd, Qd, and Rd must be greater than 0.
feedrate
(4) Illustration
7-36
 Outer convex turning [EX_ROUT]
(1) (3)
7
(4)
(2)

3rd point X3_, Z3_ - -

Feeding amount of rough turning in Cutting mode setting
Ud_ Wm_
X-axis direction (0 = rough & finish; 1 = rough; 2 = finish)
Rd_ Allowance of finish turning R_ Arc radius
Coolant switch
(8 = on; 9 = off)
 R specifies the arc radius. Set R according to the X1-, Z1-, X2-, and Z2- coordinates to
ensure the center of the arc and circle is the same. If the R value is inappropriate, an
alarm occurs when you press CYCLE START.
given path.
feedrate
(4) Illustration
7-37
 Inner convex turning [IN_ROUT]
(1) (3)
7
(4)
(2)


Ud_ Wm_
Coolant switch
(8 = on; 9 = off)
given path.
feedrate
(4) Illustration
7-38
 Outer concave turning [EX_RIN]
(1) (3)
7
(4)
(2)


Ud_ Wm_
Coolant switch
(8 = on; 9 = off)
given path.
feedrate
(4) Illustration
7-39
 Inner concave turning [IN_RIN]
(1) (3)
7
(4)
(2)


Ud_ Wm_
Coolant switch
(8 = on; 9 = off)
given path.
feedrate
(4) Illustration
7-40
 External profile turning [EX_PROF]
(1) (3)
7
(4)
(2)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Go back to
[EX_PROF]
screen
(1) Settings of machining parameters

G_ Rough turning cycle selection Wm_
(0 = rough & finish; 1 = rough; 2 = finish)
Feeding amount of rough turning Feeding amount of rough turning
Ud_ Wd_
(X-axis direction) (Z-axis direction)
Rdx_ Rdz_
Coolant switch
M_ Tm_ Number of cutting in a cycle
(8 = on; 9 = off)
7-41
 G71 / G72 / G73 are for setting the profile turning type.
G71 is suitable for machining of longer and thinner bars in Z-axis direction.
7
G72 is suitable for machining of shorter and thicker bars in X-axis direction.
G73 is suitable for workpiece that has been machined (such as forging or roughing).
 Ud is available for G71 or G73 command. It specifies the feeding amount of each
rough turning in X-axis direction in a G71 command and specifies the total cutting
depth in X-axis direction in a G73 command.
 Wd is available for G72 or G73 command. It specifies the feeding amount of each
rough turning in Z-axis direction in a G72 command and specifies the total cutting
depth in Z-axis in a G73 command.
 Tm is only available for G73 command, specifying the number of cutting in a cycle.
The feeding amount of each cut is dividing the total feeding amount specified in Ud
and Wd by Tm.
(2) Profile edit screen

The program generated in the PROFILE EDIT screen is displayed in this function. Or you
can directly enter the program in this section by using and to move the cursor to the
line to be edited.
feedrate
(4) Illustration
(5) Profile edit screen. The function is the same as that of section (2).
(6) Program edit screen

Enter the parameters of the G-code in this section and press INSERT to insert the program.
(7) Illustration for each command format

When editing the path, you can create the path according to the command formats shown in
the above figure. The three types in this section are G01, G02, and G03.
There are nine formats for the G01 command, including G01X_Z_, G01X_,A_, G01Z_,A_,
G01X_Z_,C_, G01X_Z_,R_, G01X_,A_,R_, G01Z_,A_,R_, G01X_,A_,C_, and
G01Z_,A_,C_.
The G02 format is G02X_Z_R_ and the G03 format is G03X_Z_R_. “,C” represents
automatic chamfer and “,R” represents automatic corner rounding.
7-42
 Internal profile turning [IN_PROF]
(1) (3)
7
(4)
(2)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Go back to
[IN_PROF]
screen
(1) Settings of machining parameters

G_ Rough turning cycle selection Wm_
(0 = rough & finish; 1 = rough; 2 = finish)
Feeding amount of rough turning Feeding amount of rough turning
Ud_ Wd_
Rdx_ Rdz_
Coolant switch
M_ Tm_ Number of cutting in a cycle
(8 = on; 9 = off)
7-43
 G71 / G72 / G73 are for setting the profile turning type.
G71 is suitable for machining of longer and thinner bars in Z-axis direction.
7
G72 is suitable for machining of shorter and thicker bars in X-axis direction.
G73 is suitable for workpiece that has been machined (such as forging or roughing).
 Ud is available for G71 or G73 command. It specifies the feeding amount of each
rough turning in X-axis direction in a G71 command and specifies the total cutting
depth in X-axis direction in a G73 command.
 Wd is available for G72 or G73 command. It specifies the feeding amount of each
rough turning in Z-axis direction in a G72 command and specifies the total cutting
depth in Z-axis in a G73 command.
 Tm is only available for G73 command, specifying the number of cutting in a cycle.
The feeding amount of each cut is dividing the total feeding amount specified in Ud
and Wd by Tm.
(2) Profile edit screen

The program generated in the PROFILE EDIT screen is displayed in this function. Or you
can directly enter the program in this section by using and to move the cursor to the
line to be edited.
feedrate
(4) Illustration
(5) Profile edit screen. The function is the same as that of section (2).
(6) Program edit screen

Enter the parameters of the G-code in this section and press INSERT to insert the program.
(7) Illustration for each command format

When editing the path, you can create the path according to the command formats shown in
the above figure. The three types in this section are G01, G02, and G03.
There are nine formats for the G01 command, including G01X_Z_, G01X_,A_, G01Z_,A_,
G01X_Z_,C_, G01X_Z_,R_, G01X_,A_,R_, G01Z_,A_,R_, G01X_,A_,C_, and
G01Z_,A_,C_.
The G02 format is G02X_Z_R_ and the G03 format is G03X_Z_R_. “,C” represents
automatic chamfer and “,R” represents automatic corner rounding.
7-44
7.15.4 Operation steps for graphic programming
(1) Set the controller to EDIT mode to enter the Graphic edit (GRA EDT) screen.
7
(2) GRA EDT is on the last page of the function bar in the File manage screen.
(3) Enter the Graphic edit screen and then select the disk type (CF or USB).
(4) After entering the disk, press ADD PRJ, enter the file name, and press ENTER to generate
a project file.
(5) Move the cursor to one of the project files and press ENTER to enter the file.
(6) After entering the project file, press ADD PRC to enter the screen of procedure selection.
(7) There are 18 procedures available. Every 6 procedures are in a row, respectively
corresponding to the function keys. Press and to shift the cursor to another row.
When you shift to another row of procedures, the screen of the corresponding function
keys changes as well.
(8) Select the required procedure and press the corresponding function key to enter the screen
for procedure editing.
(9) After setting the parameters, press OK, name the procedure, and press ENTER to finish
the editing.
(10) If desiring to continue with other procedures, press ADD PRC again.
(11) After finishing editing the procedures, press CONVERT to convert the files into G-code
format.
(12) The system jumps to the File edit screen after file conversion, and you can verify the
program in the screen. Then, set the system to GRA (graphic display) mode, press
PREVIEW to ensure the generated graph is correct, and then you can perform MPG
simulation or actual machining.
7-45
[File conversion example_External step turning]
The following illustrates the G-code file generated by the parameters for the external step
7
turning.
O0000 // Character string set in the INITIAL file, which is automatically added to the
beginning of the program.
;EXstep_DR0
T0303 //Tool number and compensation number
G95 F0.500 //0.5 mm/feeding amount per revolution
G92 S2000 //Maximum spindle speed
G97 S1000 //Fixed spindle speed
M3 //Spindle ON - clockwise
M8 //Coolant ON
G00 X42.000 Z5.000
G42 //Tool nose radius compensation ON
G71 U3.000 R0.5 //Feeding amount of rough turning in X-axis direction
G71 P210 Q250 U0.200 W0.200 //Allowance of finishing turning in X- and Z-axis
directions
N210 G00 X10.000 Z5.000
G01 X10.000 Z0.000 //1st point
G01 Z-20.000
G01 X20.000 Z-20.000 //2nd point
G01 Z-30.000
G01 X30.000 Z-30.000 //3rd point
G01 Z-40.000
G01 X40.000 Z-40.000 //4th point
N250 G01 U2.0 //U2.0
G00 X42.000 Z5.000
T0404 //Tool for finish turning
G70 P210 Q250 F0.100 //Program block for finish turning
G00 Z5.000
G40
G00 X50.000 Z10.000 //Coordinates of tool change point
M09
M05
M30 // Word string in the FINISH file, which is automatically added to the end of the
program
7-46
7.16 Program function in other modes

AUTO mode:
7
The PRG screen displays the content of the opened G-code file. In the screen, you can view
the status information about the opened or executed file and the block being executed. The
PRG screen in AUTO mode displays information about the program and the coordinates of
motion trajectory during program execution. The operation steps are as follows.
(1) In AUTO mode, press PRG to display the program execution screen, as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 7.16.1
7-47
(2) Continued from Step (1), press PRG again, and the screen displays the information of
program content and coordinates simultaneously, as shown in the following figure.
7 (3)
(1) (2)
(7)
(4)
(8)
(5)
(6)
(9)
Figure 7.16.2
(1) Name of current program (7) F.act: actual feedrate
(2) Currently executed program S.act: actual spindle speed
line D: tool radius compensation number
(3) Current group function H: tool length compensation number
(4) Currently executed program T: tool number
content F: feedrate
(5) Coordinate information during S: spindle speed
program execution t: dwell time
(6) Current system mode CYC: cycle time
(8) Current command status
(9) Current override settings
7-48
The function of break line search is available in AUTO mode. When the program execution is
interrupted, the system records the line number where it is interrupted (break line). You can go
to the PRG screen in AUTO mode to enable the break line search function.
When the system searches the break line, the cursor quickly moves to the line/label number you
searched for and the system quickly computes and executes the program before the specified
block to ensure the machining status is ready (including the spindle speed, feedrate, M code,
7
and coordinates) when the execution resumes, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 7.16.3

(1) In AUTO mode, press PRG to enter the program execution screen.
(2) Press SEARCH to display the Search screen.
(3) Refer to the information of break line number, enter the line or label number of the program
to be searched, and then press ENTER to complete the setting.
(4) Press RUN, the system executes the program until reaching the specified line or label of the
program.
(5) The controller executes and records the execution status of the program blocks prior to the
specified line. Then the controller stops at the break line for execution.
(6) Press CYCLE START to execute the program.
Note:
1. When finding the target block, the system stops and remains unexecuted. Press CYCLE START to
resume executing the program.
2. Supported formats for searching: line number and label (N number) of the program.
3. During program execution or the break line search function is used, any request for break line search
will be ignored as the system regards it is in execution.
7-49
When the G-code program is executed, you can use the SF set function to change the cutting
feedrate (F command) and spindle speed (S command) specified in the G-code program, as
shown in Figure 7.16.4. Enter a new command value in the SF set dialog box to change the
7 speed command during execution.
Figure 7.16.4

(2) Press SF SET and a dialog box appears for you to enter the command value.
(3) Enter the S value or F value and press ENTER to complete changing the speed command
setting.
Note:
1. The SF set function is a one-shot function with the S and F settings effective for one time in a single
execution, which do not change the commands in the G-code program. If requiring to execute this SF
setting for multiple times, you are suggested to edit the command in EDIT mode to ensure the speed
command is correct.
2. After the S value is set, the current spindle speed in the G-code program is changed immediately.
After the F value is set, the system executes with the new feedrate (F command) after the data in the
system buffer is completely processed.
3. If there is no S or F command in the G-code program, you cannot use this function to change the
speed command.
4. When using the SF set function, set Pr10017 [Bit 3] SF speed setting to enable or disable the F
setting.
7-50
The Barcode reader function is for using the barcode scanner to load the machining files named
by barcode into the file queue and execute them, which greatly saves the time for file searching.
You can connect the barcode reader to the USB slot in the front side of the controller.
Figure 7.16.5

(2) Press BARCODE to enter the screen as shown in Figure 7.16.5.
(3) Use the barcode scanner to scan the barcode to obtain the name of the machining file.
(4) To load the file content, press LOAD. To delete the file which is on the top of the FILE
QUEUE list, press CLEAR. To delete all the files on the FILE QUEUE list, press CLR ALL.
Note:
1. To use this function, you must first create the machining files in the CF card and the file names have to
be consistent with their barcodes.
2. When loading multiple files, the system executes each file in sequence. It automatically deletes the file
name from the list once completing the execution.
7-51
JOG and MPG modes:
The operation steps for SF setting are as follows.
7
(1) In JOG or MPG mode, press PRG to enter the program execution screen.
(2) Press SF SET and a dialog box appears for you to enter the command value.
(3) Enter the S value or F value and press ENTER to complete changing the speed command
setting.
With the TEACH function, you can manually move the axis to any position and use the
programming function keys, and the system can convert the final position (coordinates of the
three axes) into a motion block with coordinates specified. Set the system to JOG or MPG
mode, and you can use the TEACH function in the PRG screen for programing the existing or
new files. Functions in the TEACH screen include: rapid traverse (POSITION), linear
interpolation (LINEAR), circular interpolation (CIRCULAR), delete (DEL), file creating (NEW
FILE), file saving (SAVE), and absolute / machine coordinates (ABS / MECH). This
programming function automatically generates corresponding command formats according to
the different functions. See the following table for the generated command formats.
Function Auto-generated command format
NEW FILE G90 G40 G49 G98 G50 G64 G80 G17 G69 G21
(generate a new
file when teach G54 G15 S3000 M03 F1000
programming is Note: this function generates the corresponding G21 or G20 command according to the
parameter setting of size unit.
enabled)
POSITION
G00 + X_Y_Z_
(rapid traverse)
LINEAR
(linear G01 + X_Y_Z_
interpolation)
CIRCULAR G02 + X_Y_Z_ + I_ J_ or G03 + X_Y_Z_ + I_ J_
(circular Note: this function generates G17+I_ J_, G18+K_ I_, or G19+J_K_ corresponding to the
interpolation) X-Y, Z-X, or Y-Z plane.
ABS
(absolute G90 G00 (or G01 / G02 / G03) + X_Y_Z_
coordinates)
MECH
(machine G53 G00 (or G01 / G02 / G03) + X_Y_Z_
coordinates)
The operation steps for the TEACH function are as follows.

(1) In JOG or MPG mode, press PRG to enter the program execution screen.
(2) Press TEACH to enter the teach screen.
(3) Select the file to be programmed from the existing files or create a new file. If desiring to do
programming in the existing file, open the file in EDIT mode. If desiring to do programming
in a new file, press NEW FILE, and a dialog box appears for you to enter the file name.
Enter the file name, press ENTER, and you can create a new file in the current directory.
(4) Specify the data type of coordinates. For example, if you desire to display absolute
coordinates, press ABS on the second page of the function bar. Or press MECH to switch
to machine coordinates.
7-52
(5) Move the axis to the specified position in JOG or MPG mode, press POSITION or LINEAR
according to the requirement of the mode, and the coordinate command is inserted to the
position where the cursor is located. The coordinate command is generated according to
the data type of the coordinate values.
(6) Continue from Step (5), to specify a circular motion, press CIRCULAR to display the
corresponding function bar.
7
(7) Continue from Step (6), to specify the plane of the arc, press PLANE to select X-Y, Y-Z, or
Z-X.
(8) Move the axes in sequence and set the start, intermediate, and end points of the arc by
pressing P1, P2, and P3 respectively. After P3 is set, the values are automatically
converted into a circular cutting command. The system determines the direction of the arc
(G02 or G03) and the radius according to the trajectory of P1 - P3.
(9) If the coordinate command is incorrect, move the cursor to the block and press DEL (on the
function bar of the 1st layer in the teach screen) to delete the block.
(10) After completing the programming, in addition to the given auto-saving mechanism (press
RESET, switch to different system modes, or open another file), you can press SAVE to
save the programming results.
Note:
1. The Teach function is only available in JOG or MPG mode. It is not displayed in other modes.
2. The allowable file size for the teach function is the same as that for file editing (below 3 MB).
3. The name of the created file for the teach function must comply with the file name specification.
4. If you repeatedly enter two sets of coordinate with the same values, the system ignores the 2nd
coordinate command to avoid generating an invalid motion block.
5. Set the coordinates of P1, P2, and P3 for the arc command in sequence. The direction and radius for
the circular command is determined by the positions of P1, P2, and P3.
6. If you enter the teach screen without opening a file, the system automatically generates a blank file
named “TEACH.NC” in the directory where the cursor is located (the default setting is to generate a
file in the root directory of CF), so you can directly use the teach function.
7. When using the SF set function, set Pr10017 [Bit 3] SF speed setting to enable or disable the F
setting.
7-53
MDI mode:
In MDI mode, you can enter simple programs and save, delete, or execute the content in the
7
PRG screen, as shown in the following figure. You can enter up to 14 program blocks in the
screen. After finishing editing the program, press LOAD to reload and then execute the
program. Otherwise, the program cannot be executed.
Figure 7.16.6
Figure 7.16.7
In addition, the SAVE function is for saving the program content entered in MDI mode as a file in
the current directory. The naming method is the same as that in Section 7.2 Create a new file.
That is, the file name has to follow the naming convention and be unique. The CLR function is
for deleting all the program content in the screen in MDI mode, which functions the same as
pressing and holding RESET (you can press and hold RESET for 3 seconds to delete all the
content in the program screen).
7-54
Note:
1. In MDI mode, the RESET key has a two-stage function. Press RESET once to return to the first line of
the manual input program after program interruption. Press and hold RESET for 3 seconds to clear all
the manual input program contents.
2. In MDI mode, after M30 is executed, the cursor returns to the first line of the program. You can resume
the execution without reloading the program.

7
3. In MDI mode, if there is no M30 (Program end) command, the program runs to the last line. To resume
the execution, press LOAD to reload the program.
4. In MDI mode, after M02 is executed, the cursor stops at the block of M02 and the program status
restores to the default. And you can resume the execution from the block of M02 without reloading the
program.
7-55
7-56
Offset (OFS) group
The OFS group provides functions for setting the workpiece coordinates, tool length,
tool radius compensation, and macro variables.
8.1 Coordinate setting (COORD)································································8-2

8.1.1 Auto set (AUTO) ·········································································8-3
8.1.2 Absolute input (ABS)····································································8-7
8.1.3 Incremental input (INC) ································································8-9
8.2 Tool setting····················································································· 8-10
8.2.1 Tool length setting (Tool Offset) ···················································· 8-10
8.3 Tool magazine management ······························································ 8-15
8.3.1 Multi-magazine management ······················································· 8-20
8.4 Macro variables ··············································································· 8-21
8.4.1 Local variables (LOCAL) ····························································· 8-21
8.4.2 Global variables (GLOBAL) ························································· 8-22
8.4.3 Non-volatile variables (HOLD) ······················································ 8-22
8.4.4 Extension variables (EXTEND) ···················································· 8-22
8-1
Offset (OFS) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual
The OFS group provides functions for setting the workpiece coordinates, tool length, tool radius
compensation, and macro variables.
8
Note: bold function names in a box (such as POS) mean the keys on machine operation panel A;
bold function names (such as CLR ALL) mean the function keys of F1 - F6.
8.1 Coordinate setting (COORD)

G54 - G59 allow you to set multiple workpiece coordinate systems. With commands G54 - G59,
you can simplify the calculation of coordinates during programming as well as change the
coordinate values at any time, achieving more flexible machining process. You can specify the
coordinate values in the coordinate setting screen with one of the workpiece coordinate
commands (G54 - G59), as shown in the following figure.
(1) (2)
Figure 8.1.1
(1) Workpiece coordinate setting: offset coordinates, (2) Coordinate information: machine (MECH) /
G54 - G59 coordinate systems relative (REL) / absolute (ABS) coordinates

(1) Press OFS to enter the OFS screen.
(2) Press COORD to display the corresponding function bar.
Note:
1. Set the coordinate systems only when there is no machining program being executed. Otherwise, data
entry is prohibited.
2. If you press FEED HOLD during program execution, the system status remains “RUN”. If you press
(Single block execution) during program execution, the execution stops after the current block is
finished, and the system status is “Ready.”.
8-2
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Offset (OFS) Group
8.1.1 Auto set (AUTO)
This function is for automatically entering the current position of each axis to the coordinate
8
system (G54 - G59) where the cursor is located. The auto set function includes three options:
setting single axis (SET), setting multiple axes (SET P), and setting coordinate system center
(SET L/2). The option of setting the coordinate system center must be used with the function of
clearing relative coordinates (CLR REL). The function of clearing coordinate values of a
coordinate system (CLR ALL) is also provided.
 CLR ALL (all clear): clears all the axis values of the current coordinate system to 0 while the
values in other systems remain unchanged.
(3) Press AUTO to display the corresponding function bar.
(4) Press , , , and to move the cursor to a specific coordinate system.
(5) Press CLR ALL to delete all the data of the coordinate system.
 CLR REL (relative clear): clears the relative coordinates of the axis which the cursor is
pointing to. This function is not used for clearing the actual workpiece coordinates but for
clearing the displayed relative coordinates.
 SET L/2 (set center): this function is for setting the central position of an object as the
center of a coordinate system. The NC system automatically calculates and enters the
central position coordinate to the field, so you do not need to do it manually. The following
operation steps take the X axis as an example.
(1) Set the system to JOG or MPG mode and move the machine axis to the initial contact
point of the workpiece in X-axis direction.
(5) Press , , , and to move the cursor to the X-coordinate field of a specific
coordinate system.
(6) Press SET L/2 to enter its setting screen.
8-3
(7) Press Point1 and the circle on the left side of the rectangle becomes red, as shown in
Figure 8.1.1.1, meaning the machine coordinates of the first point is recorded.
Figure 8.1.1.1
(8) Continue to move the machine axis to the other contact point of the workpiece in X-axis
direction.
(9) Press Point2 and the circle on the right side of the rectangle becomes red, meaning
the machine coordinates of the second point is recorded.
(10) Press SET and the system automatically calculates the central point between the
machine origin and the workpiece position in X-axis direction and sets this point as
the center of X axis in the coordinate system, which is the workpiece origin of X axis.
 SET L (set single axis): this function is for automatically entering the current machine
coordinate of a single axis. When you move the cursor to the X, Y, or Z field of a specific
coordinate system and press SET L, the current machine coordinate is automatically
entered to the field where the cursor is located. This function is only for entering the data of
a single axis. The operation steps are as follows.
(5) Press , , , and to move the cursor to the X-coordinate field of a specific
coordinate system.
(6) Press SET L to automatically enter the axis coordinate value in the field where the
cursor is located.
8-4
Example of setting single axis
This example illustrates setting X-axis value by moving the machine axis to a specific position
8
(workpiece origin in X-axis direction as shown in Figure 8.1.1.2).
X axis workpiece origin
Workpiece
Machine origin Specify the moving distance

in X-axis direction
Figure 8.1.1.2
Then the coordinate values are displayed in the machine coordinate fields as shown in Figure
8.1.1.3. Move the cursor to a specific coordinate system (such as G54 as shown in Figure
8.1.1.3) and press SET L to automatically enter the X-axis value of the machine coordinate to the
X-axis field in G54 coordinate system, completing the data entry for single axis.
Figure 8.1.1.3
8-5
 SET P (set multiple axes): this function is for automatically entering the coordinates of
multiple axes. After completing the calibration of workpiece center, you can use this
function to enter the machine coordinates of multiple axes (including X, Y, Z, and other axes)
8 simultaneously. The operation steps are as follows.

(6) Press SET P to automatically enter the coordinate values of multiple axes in the
coordinate system field where the cursor is located.
Note: if you have set the coordinates of other axes, do not press CLR ALL to clear the axis values, or the
coordinate values are all cleared.
Example of setting multiple axes
Move the machine axis to a specific position as the workpiece origin shown in Figure 8.1.1.4 (the
figure illustrates the position of X and Y axes except Z axis).
Workpiece origin
Specify the moving Workpiece

distance in Y-axis
direction
Machine origin Specify the moving

distance in X-axis direction
Figure 8.1.1.4
After completing the calibration of workpiece origin, the coordinate values are displayed in the
machine coordinate fields as shown in Figure 8.1.1.5. Move the cursor to the G54 coordinate
system and press SET P to automatically enter the values of X-, Y-, Z-, and C-axes of the
machine coordinate to the X-, Y-, Z-, and C-axis fields in the G54 coordinate system, completing
the data entry for multiple axes.
8-6
Figure 8.1.1.5
8.1.2 Absolute input (ABS)
One of the manual input function for coordinate values, which includes absolute and incremental
settings. The following operation steps illustrate the absolute setting.
(4) To enter positive values, press 0 - 9; to enter negative values, you have to press before
using the numeral keys. After entering the values, press to determine the number of
decimal places.
(5) Press ABS to enter absolute coordinates to the coordinate system.
Note:
1. The displayed values are in the unit of mm. If you enter values without specifying the decimal points,
they are in the unit of μm. For example, “123456” = 123456 μm = 123.456 mm.
2. In Step (5), you can press either ABS or ENTER to enter the coordinates.
8-7
Example of absolute setting
Move the tool center from the machine origin to the workpiece origin (X, Y). Then, enter the X-
8
and Y- machine coordinates corresponding to the workpiece origin for the coordinate setting
(G54 - G59) in the OFS group.
Ｗorkpiece origin (0 , 0)
Specify the moving Workpiece

distance in Y-axis
direction
Machine origin (0 , 0) Specify the moving

distance in X-axis direction
Figure 8.1.2.1
Figure 8.1.2.2
8-8
8.1.3 Incremental input (INC)
One of the manual input function for coordinate values, usually used for fine adjustment of the
8
original value. That is, you change the values incrementally. For example, when the original
value is 150.000, if you enter 5.000 by incremental setting, the newly-set value is 155.000.
(3) Press , , , and to move the cursor to the X-, Y, or Z-axis field of a specific
coordinate system.
(4) To enter positive values, press 0 – 9; to enter negative values, you have to press before
using the numeral keys. After entering the values, press to determine the number of
decimal places.
(5) Press INC to increment the coordinate values.
Note: make sure you use the correct mode (ABS or INC) and enter the correct coordinates to avoid danger
caused by incorrect axis movement.
8-9
8.2 Tool setting

8.2.1 Tool length setting (Tool Offset)
8
 Functions of tool setting for the lathe system include tool length compensation, tool length
wear compensation, tool nose radius, tool radius wear, and tool nose type. Prior to using
the compensation functions, go to the tool setting screens in the OFS group to enter the
tool compensation values. During program editing, specify the tool radius compensation
number which corresponds to the number in the compensation data table.
 Format of tool compensation:
T0204: 02 represents tool number 2 and 04 represents the tool length and tool wear
compensation settings for tool number 4.
T02: if only one set of number is specified, it means you use tool number 2 and its tool
length and tool wear compensation settings for the machining, which is the same as
T0202.
The tool length (Tool Offset) setting screen is as shown in the following figure.
(1)
(4)
(2) (3)
Figure 8.2.1.1
(1) Compensation number and tool (3) Input mode selection
length of the corresponding axis (4) Auxiliary display: machine (MECH),
(2) Input field for compensation data absolute (ABS), and relative (REL)
coordinates
Setting range for tool data

Tool length -2000.0 to 2000.0 mm
8-10
The tool wear setting screen is as shown in the following figure.
8
(1)
(4)
(2)
(3)
Figure 8.2.1.2
(1) Compensation number for tool wear and (3) Input mode selection
wear value of the corresponding axis (4) Auxiliary display: machine (MECH),
coordinates

Tool wear for each axis -2000.0 to 2000.0 mm
Tool radius wear compensation -2000.0 to 2000.0 mm
Illustration of tool wear:
(1) Compensation amount of the tool nose wear for X axis
(2) Compensation amount of the tool nose wear for Z axis
8-11
The tool nose setting screen is as shown in the following figure.
8
(1)
(4)
(2)
(3)
Figure 8.2.1.3
(1) Compensation number for tool nose radius and (3) Input mode selection
corresponding compensation value (4) Auxiliary display: machine (MECH),
coordinates

Tool nose radius compensation -2000.0 to 2000.0 mm
Tool nose type 0-9
Tool nose types:
(1) Tool nose type 0 or 9 (2) Tool nose types 1 - 4 (3) Tool nose types 5 - 8
8-12
Illustration of tool nose position and tool nose radius compensation:
8
(4) Actual tool nose position
(5) Hypothetical tool nose position when calibration
(6) R value of tool nose radius compensation
Descriptions for Tool Offset function keys are as follows.
 ABS (absolute input): use this function to set absolute values for tool length, tool radius,
tool wear compensation, or tool life. You can press either ABS or ENTER to enter absolute
values.
 INC (incremental input): use this function to set incremental values for tool length, tool
radius, tool wear compensation, and tool life.
 LEN OFST (tool length offset): the function is for automatically entering the tool length
compensation values. Enter the absolute coordinate of each axis, and the corresponding
tool length compensation values are automatically calculated (machine coordinates - input
values). It avoids the risk of entering incorrect values and shortens the setting time.
 ABS OFST (absolute offset): writes the current absolute coordinates to the tool table.
 CLR ONE (clear single axis): clears all the offset data of one single axis.
 ABS/INC MODE (absolute / incremental mode): when you set Pr10059 to 1 (absolute) or 2
(incremental), the ABS/INC function key displays. When you set Pr10059 to 0, the function
key is not available. You can enter the value and then press ENTER to determine whether
this value is absolute or incremental.
8-13

(1) Press , , , and to move the cursor to the tool length field of a specific number.
(2) Enter absolute coordinates in the input field, press LEN OFST, and the controller
8 automatically calculates the tool length compensation amount of the axis where the cursor is
located.
The calculation is: [Current machine coordinates] - [The input absolute coordinates] = [Tool
length compensation amount]
The input absolute coordinates consist of signed values.
[Example of tool length compensation for X axis]
Enter 20.0 (the measured diameter of X axis after cutting in the unit of mm) to the input field of
compensation value for X axis, press LEN OFST, and the system automatically calculates the
tool length compensation value.
Important: when the cutting is complete, press LEN OFST without moving the X axis (do not
change its machine coordinates).
8-14
8.3 Tool magazine management

This function is for managing the tool positions and their corresponding tool magazine numbers
8
after tool change. When a different tool is used, the tool pocket positions and the corresponding
tool numbers are recorded in the tool magazine data table.
You can view the recorded tool number corresponding to the tool pocket positions and also
change the sequence of the tool number in the tool magazine data table. With parameter settings,
you can enable the multi-magazine management function. The function of tool magazine
management is only available in JOG mode, as shown in the following figure.
(1) (2)
(3)
(7)
(4)
(5) (8)
Figure 8.3.1 (6)
(1) Name of current program (7) Number of tool magazine system
(2) Currently executed program line Tool number for current command
(3) Current group function Current standby tool number
(4) Sequence of tool number Current standby tool pocket number
(5) Tool number input field (8) Spindle tool number
(6) Current override settings
The operation steps for tool magazine setting are as follows.

(1) Set the system to JOG mode.
(3) Press MAGA to enter the tool magazine data setting screen.
(4) Press , , , and to move the cursor to a specific field.
(5) Enter the tool number and press SET (or ENTER) to change its corresponding tool
magazine.
8-15
Example of changing tool number
When you specify a number that has already existed in the data table, the system automatically
8
exchanges the one to be replaced with the one that is repeated. This is for ensuring that the tool
numbers in each address of the tool magazine do not overlap, preventing the tool call error.
Workflow description:
(1) Initial status of the tool magazine.

Tool numbers are arranged in
sequence in accordance with the
tool magazine numbers.
(2) If you set the tool number of tool

magazine 1 to 2, then the tool
number of tool magazine 2
becomes 1. That is, the tool
numbers for tool magazines 1 and
2 are exchanged.
(3) If you set the tool number of tool

magazine 3 to 5, then the tool
number of tool magazine 5
becomes 3. That is, the tool
numbers for tool magazines 3 and
5 are exchanged.
According to the above examples, the mechanism of tool number change can avoid the
possibility of mistakenly calling the incorrect tool number.
8-16
 RST ALL (reset all): the tool magazine management provides the function of resetting the
tool magazines by rearranging the tool numbers. After resetting, the records of changes in
tool number are cleared. The tool numbers are arranged in sequence according to the tool
magazine numbers. With this function, you can restore the data to default setting for
troubleshooting tool number misplacement or tool number resetting. The operation steps
are as follows.
8
(4) Press RST ALL to reset the tool magazine data table.
 LOCK (tool magazine lock): use this function to lock the spare tool magazines. Tool
numbers of the locked magazines cannot be called. If you use a command in the program
to call a locked tool, the system enables the protection mechanism and displays an error
message to stop the execution. This function is a preventive mechanism for checking the
tool status during program execution, avoiding errors caused by incorrect tool call, such as
damage to the latch of the tool magazine or interference to the magazine due to adjacent
tools of large diameter. The data fields of the locked magazines are specified with different
colors. The operation steps are as follows.
(4) Press , , , and to move the cursor to a specific data field.
(5) Press LOCK to lock that magazine, as shown in Figure 8.3.2.
Figure 8.3.2
8-17
Example of locking the tool magazine
This function is used for preventing the tool of large diameter from damaging its adjacent tools by
8
blocking the adjacent magazines to ensure the machine will not be damaged due to
misoperation by personnel. By blocking the magazines adjacent to the magazine which carries a
tool of large diameter, you can avoid executing inappropriate tool call program and thus prevent
the possible collision caused by placing tools into the adjacent magazines.
Figure 8.3.3
Assume that T1 is a tool of large diameter and the adjacent tools are T2 and T16, you can avoid
its interference with the adjacent tools by locking T2 and T16, as shown in the above figure.
Figure 8.3.4
If T1 is a tool of large diameter, its interference with adjacent tools is as shown in Figure 8.3.4.
With T2 and T16 locked, you cannot call tools in the two magazine positions.
8-18
 UNLOCK (tool magazine unlock): you can use this function to unlock the magazines. The
(4) Press , , , and to move the cursor to the data field which has been locked.
8
(5) Press UNLOCK to unlock the tool magazine. Or you can enter the same tool number to
the data field of the locked magazine and press ENTER to unlock.
8-19
8.3.1 Multi-magazine management
In response to the application needs for managing multiple tool magazines, you can enable this
8
function with tool magazine parameters after accessing the security authorization. You can
specify the number of tool pockets for each tool magazine system according to the tool magazine
specification as well as the tool numbers after resetting the tool magazine. The items [MAGA1]
and [MAGA2] on the function bar are for dividing the management of the two different tool
magazine systems. Contact the distributors for services of the multi-magazine management
function.
Figure 8.3.1.1
Note:
1. You can set the tool numbers only when the system is in JOG mode. Otherwise, the corresponding
function bar is not displayed.
2. You have to access the security authorization in advance before setting or resetting the tool numbers.
3. Tool numbers in the same tool magazine system cannot be repeated. If you specify a number which
already exists in the magazine, the system automatically changes the existing one with a
non-repeating number. This is for ensuring the tool numbers in each address of the magazine do not
overlap, preventing the tool call error.
4. The default spindle tool number is T0. Once tool T0 is placed into the tool magazine, its position in the
magazine is recorded as T0 and cannot be locked. That is, when the displayed tool number is “0”, the
LOCK function is disabled, and a dialog box appears and displays “T0 can’t be locked!”.
8-20
8.4 Macro variables

Using commands with variables, you can modify values, perform conditional operations, and
8
input or output MLC data during program execution. There are four types of macro variables:
local, global, non-volatile, and extension variables, with the data type as double word.
Figure 8.4.1
8.4.1 Local variables (LOCAL)
Local variables (#1 - #50) are available only in the current program.
(2) Press MACRO to display the variable entry screen.
(3) Press LOCAL and the screen is automatically switched to display the variable table starting
with number 1.
(5) Enter the value and press ENTER to complete the setting.
8-21
8.4.2 Global variables (GLOBAL)
Global variables (#51 - #250) are shared by main programs, subprograms, and macro programs.
8
(3) Press GLOBAL and the screen is automatically switched to display the variable table
starting with number 51.
8.4.3 Non-volatile variables (HOLD)
Non-volatile variables (#1601 - #1800) are for retaining the system status when power is off. The
(3) Press HOLD and the screen is automatically switched to display the variable table starting
with number 1601.
8.4.4 Extension variables (EXTEND)
Up to 500 extension variables (#10001 - #10500) are available for the system.
(3) Press EXTEND and the screen is automatically switched to display the variable table starting
with number 10001.
8-22
Diagnosis (DGN) Group
The DGN group provides functions of machining information, user variables, system
monitoring, and parameter importing / exporting, which help you to optimize the
system.
9.1 Machining information (PROCESS) ·······················································9-2

9.2 User variable (USR VAR) ····································································9-4
9.3 MLC ·······························································································9-5
9.3.1 Bit (BIT) ·····················································································9-5
9.3.2 Register (REG) ···········································································9-6
9.3.3 Device monitoring (DEV MON) ·······················································9-7
9.3.4 Line search (JUMP TO) ································································9-8
9.3.5 Editor (EDITOR) ··········································································9-9
9.3.6 Operation (SET) ········································································ 9-12
9.4 System monitoring (SYS MON) ·························································· 9-13
9.4.1 Servo monitoring (SRV MON) ······················································ 9-13
9.4.2 I/O monitoring (I/O MON) ···························································· 9-13
9.4.3 Variable monitoring (VAR MON) ···················································· 9-14
9.5 Password setting (PWD) ··································································· 9-16
9.5.1 System security (S SCP) ····························································· 9-16
9.5.2 Machine security (M SCP) ··························································· 9-17
9.5.3 User security (U1 SCP & U2 SCP) ················································ 9-19
9.5.4 Time limit (EXPIRE) ··································································· 9-20
9.6 System information (STATUS) ···························································· 9-23
9.7 Gain tuning (TUNING) ······································································ 9-24
9.8 Import (IMPORT) ············································································· 9-27
9.9 Export (EXPORT) ············································································ 9-28
9.10 Multi-language (TEXT WR) ······························································ 9-30
9.11 LOGO (LOGO WR) ········································································ 9-30
9-1
Diagnosis (DGN) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual
The DGN group includes a variety of functions. Machining information, user variables, system
monitoring, gain adjustment, and system information are for optimizing the system. MLC
diagnosis is for monitoring the current status of the MLC devices in the system. Password setting
allows you to assign security authorization for different system functions. In addition, system
9 parameters can be imported and exported.
9.1 Machining information (PROCESS)

You can set the number of machined workpiece and number of workpiece to be machined,
as well as clear the machining time and number of machined workpiece on the screen as shown
in the following figure.
Figure 9.1.1

(1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.
(2) Press PROCESS to enter the machining information screen.
(3) Press SET NR and a dialog box appears for you to enter the number of machining workpiece
as shown in the following figure.
Figure 9.1.2
9-2
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Diagnosis (DGN) Group
(4) Press and to move the cursor to a specific field.

(5) Enter a value within the range of 0 - 9999 and press ENTER to complete the setting.
In addition, you can clear the current machining time and number of machined workpiece on the
machining information screen.
The operation steps for clearing the machining time are as follows.
9
(3) Press CLR TIME and a dialog box appears for confirmation.
(4) Enter “Y” and press ENTER to clear the machining time for a single workpiece on the
screen.
The operation steps for clearing the number of machined workpiece are as follows.
(3) Press CLR NR and a dialog box appears for confirmation.
(4) Enter “Y” and press ENTER to clear the number of machined workpiece on the screen.
9-3
9.2 User variable (USR VAR)

The functions of user variable include system variable (SYS VAR), user variable (USR VAR), and
machine variable (M VAR). You can use the function of system variable to monitor specific
9 variables, and use the functions of user variable and machine variable to enter the names of
registers (D512 - D1023) and display the corresponding data on the screen. With the displayed
types of registers, you can easily control the corresponding devices by monitoring and changing
the setting values of the registers (D512 - D1023).
Figure 9.2.1
The operation steps for user variable and machine variable are as follows.
(2) Press USR VAR to enter the variable monitoring screen.
(3) Press USR VAR or M VAR on the function bar in the second layer to enter the setting screen.
(4) Press and or PAGE UP and PAGE DN to move the cursor to a specific field.
(5) Enter the specified register number (D512 - D1023) and press ENTER to load the data in the
register of the specified number.
(6) Move the cursor to the value field of the specified register, enter a valid value (range: 0 -
65535), and press ENTER to set the value.
(7) Press US DEC, HEX, S DEC, or FLOAT to select the data format display.
(8) To delete data, move the cursor to the data field and press DEL to delete the data.
9-4
9.3 MLC
This function displays the current status of each MLC device, so you can monitor and force On or
Off each device. You can also check the system status, drive a certain MLC device, or edit the
MLC. See Figure 9.3.1 for the MLC screen. MLC-related diagnostic functions include bit status,
register status, device monitoring, MLC status switching, and MLC editing. The operation steps
for these functions are described in the following sections.
9
Figure 9.3.1
9.3.1 Bit (BIT)
MLC programs require a number of commands to trigger the devices to On or Off. Status of these
devices is shown on the MLC Bit Device screen. This function is for displaying the bit type MLC
devices, searching the device, and forcing the device to On or Off. The following operation steps
take the M devices as an example.
(2) Press MLC to display the function bar in the second layer.
(3) Press BIT to enter the bit device status display screen.
(4) Press M to switch to the status display for M devices as shown in the following figure.
Move the cursor to a specific device field or search for the device by following Step (5).
Figure 9.3.1.1
9-5
(5) Enter the device name, such as 107, and press M to search for the specified device, M107.
To change the status of this device, set the system to non-AUTO mode. Refer to Step (6) for
the operation steps.
(6) Specify the device which status is to be changed. Depending on its current status, enter “1”
9 to force it to On or “0” to force it to Off, then press ENTER.
9.3.2 Register (REG)
Most of the CNC system functions are enabled by MLC programs. MLC devices are divided into bit
type and word type. The following operation steps take the word type MLC device and T registers
as an example.
(3) Press REG to enter the register device screen.
Figure 9.3.2.1
(4) Press T to enter the register T setting screen.

(5) Enter the device name, such as 10, and press T to search for the device, T10.
(6) Enter the value in the input field and press ENTER to complete the setting.
(7) Go to the last page of the function bar and press US DEC, HEX, S DEC, or FLOAT to select
the data format display.
9-6
9.3.3 Device monitoring (DEV MON)
Up to 45 sets of device data can be monitored with this function. The operation steps are as
follows.
(3) Press DEV MON to display the corresponding screen as shown in Figure 9.3.3.1.
9
Figure 9.3.3.1
(4) Enter the name of the device to be monitored as shown in Figure 9.3.3.2. You can enter up to
45 device names.
Figure 9.3.3.2
Dev (device): when the cursor is located in this field, you can enter the name of the device to
be monitored.
Value: move the cursor to this field to set the data of the device.
Status: enter “0” or “1” to set the device status.
9-7
In addition, you can switch the data format display according to the requirements by using the
functions of US DEC, HEX, S DEC, and FLOAT. The data in Figure 9.3.3.3 are in hexadecimal
format and the data in Figure 9.3.3.4 are in floating format.
Figure 9.3.3.3
Figure 9.3.3.4
9.3.4 Line search (JUMP TO)
Use this function to search for a specific line according to the entered line number of the MLC
program.
(3) Enter a specific line number of the MLC program and press JUMP TO to go to the target line.
9-8
9.3.5 Editor (EDITOR)
Use this function to manage and edit the MLC programs. You can directly edit the MLC programs
on the controller interface with the system set to EDIT mode.
 Basic MLC commands

Basic MLC commands, including LD, LDI, LDP, LDF, OUT, APP, —, and ︱, are created
with the function of MLC editing, as shown in Figure 9.3.5.1.
9
Figure 9.3.5.1
The operation steps for creating command LD are as follows.

(3) Press EDITOR to enter the MLC Edit screen as shown in Figure 9.3.5.1.
(4) Press , , , and to move the cursor to the field to be edited.
(5) Enter the device name and press LD to complete creating the command.
The above steps are also applicable for creating LDI, LDP, LDF, OUT, APP, — , and ︱
commands.
9-9
To specify the values for the basic commands, press TABLE to display the MLC table as
shown in the following figure.
Figure 9.3.5.2
 Editing (CUT, COPY, PASTE)

These editing functions are MLC-specific, with which you can delete, cut, or copy a single
line of program. Or you can use the SELECT function to delete, cut, or copy a certain
section of the MLC program. After completing the editing, use the SAVE function to
recompile and save the edited MLC program. The operation steps for editing MLC
programs are as follows.
(5) Repeatedly press to display the function bar on the last page in this layer.
(6) Press the corresponding function key such as CUT to edit. When editing MLC
programs, press the corresponding function keys according to the editing requirements,
including SELECT, DEL, CUT, COPY, PASTE, ADD LN, and DEL LN.
9-10
 Symbol
Use this function to search, delete, copy, and paste the MLC devices. MLC devices are
represented with the symbols X, Y, M, A, T, C, D, P, and I. The operation steps are as
follows.
9
(5) Press to display the function bar on the third page.
(6) Press SYMBOL to display the corresponding function bar.
(7) Press the function key, such as X, to display the list of corresponding devices and use
the functions of delete, copy, or paste as required.
Note: the above steps are applicable to other device symbols.
 Save, import, and export MLC

After editing the MLC program, use the SAVE function to recompile and save the program.
Then restart the system to update the MLC program. In addition, use the corresponding
function keys (IMPORT / EXPORT) to import or export MLC files.
9-11
9.3.6 Operation (SET)
The system runs the MLC program right after starting. To manually switch the execution status,
use this function to stop the MLC program. This function is for switching the MLC program status
9 to On or Off, which is usually used for testing or checking the MLC devices in the system. The
(3) Press SET to switch to the screen of MLC execution status.
(4) Press RUN / STP to force switch the MLC program status.
Note: after stopping the MLC program, you can see the status of “MLC Stop” in the system status field.
In addition, you can force the MLC device to On or Off using the corresponding functions.
 The operation steps for forcing the device status to On are as follows.
(4) Press , , , and to move the cursor to a specific device.
(5) Press ON to switch the MLC status to On.
 The operation steps for forcing the device status to Off are as follows.
(4) Press , , , and to move the cursor to a specific device.
(5) Press OFF to switch the MLC status to Off.
9-12
9.4 System monitoring (SYS MON)

This function categorizes the various calculation results of the system and displays them
according to their types for your reference.
9.4.1 Servo monitoring (SRV MON)
This function displays the servo drive status on the screen of the system, from which you can
9
check the information about the channel port number and servo status of each axis. As shown in
Figure 9.4.1.1, both the spindle and Z axis are in the Off status and both X and Y axes are in the
On status.
Figure 9.4.1.1

(2) Press SYS MON to switch to the system monitoring screen.
(3) Press SRV MON to display the servo monitoring screen.
9.4.2 I/O monitoring (I/O MON)
The NC series system can add the control switches for external devices with the I/O extension
modules. You can monitor the status of the I/O extension control board connected to the system
on the I/O monitoring screen. The operation steps are as follows.
(3) Press I/O MON to display the I/O extension module status monitoring screen.
9-13
9.4.3 Variable monitoring (VAR MON)
 System variables (SYS VAR): VS0 - VS31 and VS100 - VS131. The operation steps are as
follows.
9 (1) Press DGN to enter the DGN screen.

(3) Press to display the function bar on the second page.
(4) Press VAR MON to display the variable monitoring screen.
(5) Press SYS VAR to display the system variable screen.
(6) Press PAGE UP and PAGE DN to scroll to the page with the specified variable.
(7) You can also enter the full name of a specific system variable and press ENTER,
or enter the variable number and press SYS VAR to search for and display the
specified system variable.
Figure 9.4.3.1
 Channel variables (CH VAR): VC0 - VC31, VC100 - VC131, and VC200 - VC231.
(5) Press CH VAR to display the channel variable screen.
(7) You can also enter the full name of a specific channel variable and press ENTER,
or enter the variable number and press CH VAR to search for and display the specified
channel variable.
9-14
 Axis variables (AXIS VAR): VA0 - VA31, VA100 - VA131, and VA200 - VA231.
(5) Press AXIS VAR to display the axis variable screen.
9
(7) You can also enter the full name of a specific axis variable and press ENTER, or enter
the variable number and press AXIS VAR to search for and display the specified axis
variable.
 Interface variables (IF VAR): VH0 - VH31, VH200 - VH231, VH400 - VH431, and
VH800 - VH863. The operation steps are as follows.
(5) Press IF VAR to display the interface variable screen.
(7) You can also enter the full name of a specific interface variable and press ENTER,
or enter the variable number and press IF VAR to search for and display the specified
interface variable.
 MLC variables (MLC VAR): VM0 - VM49. The operation steps are as follows.
(5) Press MLC VAR to display the MLC variable screen.
(7) You can also enter the full name of a specific MLC variable and press ENTER, or enter
the variable number and press MLC VAR to search for and display the specified MLC
variable.
9-15
9.5 Password setting (PWD)

In order to effectively control the operation security of the system functions, you can use this
function to assign different levels of authorization for the system (system maintenance), machine
9 (mechanical devices), and user (operation). This prevents unauthorized users from changing the
system settings and thus affecting the system operation.
9.5.1 System security (S SCP)
This function includes security lock (LOCK), security unlock (UNLOCK), and system check (SYS
CHECK). The password must be four characters containing at least one letter and one number
(no special characters). The operation steps for locking and unlocking the system security are as
follows.
(2) Press PWD to switch to the function bar of password setting.
(3) Press S SCP to display the corresponding function bar.
(4) When the system security is in the unlocked status, press LOCK to immediately lock all
system-related functions.
(5) When the system security is in the locked status, press UNLOCK, and a dialog box appears
for you to enter the valid password.
(6) After entering the password, press ENTER to unlock the system.
The operation steps for system check are as follows.

(3) Press S SCP to display the corresponding function bar.
(4) When the system is in the unlocked status, press SYS CHECK to check the status of the
items. If the check box for an item is selected, it means that item is in error.
9-16
9.5.2 Machine security (M SCP)
This function includes password change (PWG CHG), security lock / security unlock (LOCK /
UNLOCK), and user reset (RST U1 and RST U2). The password must be four characters
containing at least one letter and one number (no special characters). The operation steps for
changing the machine security are as follows.
9
(3) Press M SCP to switch to the function bar of machine security.
(4) Press PWD CHG and a dialog box appears as shown in Figure 9.5.2.1. Enter the old
password, new password, and retype the new password for confirmation.
(5) Press ENTER to complete changing the password.
Figure 9.5.2.1
The operation steps for unlocking the machine security are as follows.
(4) When the machine security is in the locked status, press UNLOCK and a dialog box appears
for you to enter the valid password.
(5) Enter the valid password and press ENTER to unlock the machine security.
Note: the default password for machine security is 0000 which is not assigned to any authorization level,
meaning that users of any level can access the machine-related functions. You need to change the
default password of 0000 to enable the machine security, and only users with the authorization can
access the machine-related functions.
9-17
The operation steps for locking the machine security are as follows.
9 (4) When the machine security is in the unlocked status, press LOCK to immediately lock all
machine-related functions.
The function of user reset allows the equipment supplier to reset the user’s password. If you
forget the password, ask the equipment supplier to reset the password to the default. This
function is only available when the password is changed from the default. The operation steps
are as follows.
(4) Press RST U1 or RST U2 to reset the user’s password.
Function enabling (FUN ENA) allows the equipment supplier to enable or disable the group
functions. Once the selected group function check box is cleared, the group function is disabled
after restarting. The operation steps are as follows.
(4) Press FUN ENA to enter the setting screen for enabling or disabling the group functions.
(5) Press and to move the cursor to the check box of the group function to be cleared and
press ENTER to clear the check box. Then press OK and restart the system for the changes
to take effect.
(6) Continued from Step (5), to maintain the original settings, press CANCEL to exit the screen
and discard the previous settings.
(7) To restore to the system default setting, press DEFAULT.
Figure 9.5.2.2
9-18
The function of restoring to default (DEFAULT) allows users to restore the system with the
system backup file when the system is in error or the system data is seriously damaged. In the
Default screen, if the check box is selected, it means the data of that item is damaged. You can
use this function to restore the data of that item. This function is available only when you are
authorized. The operation steps are as follows.
9
(4) Press DEFAULT to enter the corresponding screen and press , , , and to move
the cursor. Press ENTER to select the item to be restored.
(5) Clear the check box: move the cursor to the selected item and press ENTER to clear the
check box.
(6) Press OK to restore the system.
9.5.3 User security (U1 SCP & U2 SCP)
This function includes U1 SCP and U2 SCP. The functions of user security include password
change (PWD CHG), security lock (LOCK), and security unlock (UNLOCK). The password must
be four characters containing at least one letter and one number (no special characters). Take
U1 SCP for example, the operation steps for changing the user password are as follows.
(3) When U1 SCP is locked, press U1 SCP and a dialog box appears for you to enter the
password for U1 SCP.
(4) Enter the valid password for U1 SCP, press ENTER, and U1 SCP is unlocked and the
corresponding function bar is displayed.
(5) Press PWD CHG and a dialog box appears. Enter the old password, new password, and
retype the new password for confirmation.
The operation steps for unlocking the user security are as follows.
(3) When U1 SCP is locked, press U1 SCP and a dialog box appears for you to enter the
password for U1 SCP.
(4) Enter the valid password for U1 SCP, press ENTER, and U1 SCP is unlocked and the
corresponding function bar is displayed.
9-19
The operation steps for locking the user security are as follows.
(3) When U1 SCP is unlocked, press U1 SCP and a dialog box appears for you to enter the
9 password for U1 SCP.

(4) Press LOCK to lock U1 SCP.
Note: the function of user security is the same as that of machine security. The default password for user
security is 0000 which is not assigned to any authorization level. You need to change the default
password of 0000 to enable the user security.
9.5.4 Time limit (EXPIRE)
For specific situations that require a time limit on usage, you can set the operation time for the
controller by security authorization. After the time limit is set, the available duration (hours / days)
is automatically controlled by the system. When this function is enabled, you can only remove or
reset the time limit with the proper authorization. When the time limit is not set or is disabled,
no expiration date is displayed in the Deadline field on the screen, as shown in Figure 9.5.4.1.
Once you set the time limit and do not disable it, the expiration date is displayed in the Deadline
field, as shown in Figure 9.5.4.2.
Figure 9.5.4.1
Figure 9.5.4.2
9-20
You can see the controller’s operation expiration date and time on this screen. When the duration
is up, the system will be locked, meaning that any execution of G-code program (in both AUTO and
MDI modes) is prohibited. The execution will not resume until the time limit setting is disabled or
extended. If the time limit expires, contact the distributor or equipment supplier for entering the
valid password to remove the time limit.
You can set the time limit only when the function is not enabled. The operation steps for setting
9
the time limit are as follows.
(3) Press EXPIRE to display the expiration information.
(4) Press SETTING to display the setting screen of time limit.
(5) Enter a valid password to set the time limit for the controller’s operating duration.
The operation steps for removing the time limit are as follows (contact the distributor or
equipment supplier for services).
(4) Press RELEASE and a dialog box appears for you to enter the activation code as shown in
Figure 9.5.4.3.
Figure 9.5.4.3
(5) Press ENTER and cycle power to the system to remove the time limit.
Note: after the time limit is removed, no expiration date is displayed in the Deadline field as shown in Figure
9.5.4.1, which means no time limit is set for the system.
9-21
The proper authorization is required to lock or unlock the EXP SCP function. When the function
is locked, enter the valid security password to unlock it. When the function is unlocked, you can
use all the functions for the time limit setting. The functions include password change (PWD
CHG), security lock (LOCK), and security unlock (UNLOCK). The password must be four
9 characters containing at least one letter and one number (no special characters).
The operation steps for changing the password for EXP SCP are as follows.
(4) When EXP SCP is locked, press EXP SCP and a dialog box appears for you to enter the
password for EXP SCP.
(5) Enter the valid password, press ENTER, and EXP SCP is unlocked and the corresponding
function bar appears.
(6) Press PWD CHG and a dialog box appears. Enter the old password, new password, and
retype the new password for confirmation.
The operation steps for unlocking the expiration security are as follows.
(4) When EXP SCP is locked, press EXP SCP and a dialog box appears for you to enter the
password for EXP SCP.
(5) Enter the valid password, press ENTER, and EXP SCP is unlocked and the corresponding
function bar appears.
The operation steps for locking the expiration security are as follows.
(4) When EXP SCP is unlocked, press EXP SCP to display the corresponding function bar.
(5) Press LOCK to lock EXP SCP.
9-22
9.6 System information (STATUS)

This function provides information about the firmware and hardware versions of the system.
You can maintain and optimize the system according to the version information displayed on the
screen. The functions include system status, firmware serial number, hardware serial number,
and equipment information.
The operation steps for system status display are as follows.

9
(2) Press STATUS to enter the system information screen.
(3) Press SYSTEM to display the system status screen.
The firmware serial number display includes the firmware version of the system. The operation
steps for displaying the firmware serial number are as follows.
(3) Press FW SN to display the firmware versions of the system as shown in the following figure.
Figure 9.6.1
The operation steps for displaying the hardware serial number are as follows.
(3) Press HW SN to display the hardware version.
The operation steps for displaying the device information are as follows.
(3) Press M INFO to display the device information screen.
(4) You can enter the device information on the screen or press DEL to delete the information in
the field where the cursor is located.
9-23
9.7 Gain tuning (TUNING)

The auto tuning function enables the NC system and servo drive to provide optimized motion
control for meeting different machine characteristics. The NC series controller reads the initial
9 servo parameters and calibrates the motion control with the gain tuning function. The results of
gain tuning are returned to the servo drive, so the control parameters of the controller and drive
are consistent. This facilitates the gain tuning procedure and maintains high-precision control of
the system. The Servo Tuning screen is as shown in the following figure and the operation steps
for each subordinate function are as follows.
(4)
(1)
(5)
(2) (3)
(1) Servo parameter number: number and name of (3) System settings: displays the current servo
servo parameters settings
(2) Results after tuning: displays the calculation (4) Position setting: Position 1 / Position 2
results of auto tuning (5) Tuning conditions
9-24
 Next axis (NEXT AX): for switching to another axis for gain tuning setting. You need to
perform auto tuning for each axis separately, so after completing the setting of one axis, use
this function to switch to another axis and continue auto tuning. The operation steps are as
follows.
(3) Press TUNING to enter the auto tuning setting screen.
9
(4) If you need to set the gain parameters for other axes, press NEXT AX to switch to the
specified axis.
 Read servo parameters (READ): accesses the parameter values from the servo and writes
them in the Calculate fields. The operation steps are as follows.
(4) Press READ to read the servo parameters.
 RUN, JOG←, JOG→, POS1, POS2: these functions are for setting the operation of auto
tuning. Use these functions to enable auto tuning, and set and operate the positioning
direction. The operation steps for the continuous operation of a single axis are as follows.
(5) Press JOG← to move to the left positioning point.
(6) Press POS1 to set the left positioning point.
(7) Press JOG→ to move to the right positioning point.
(8) Press POS2 to set the right positioning point. The movement is now limited to between
Position 1 and Position 2.
(9) Press RUN to start auto tuning.
(10) During auto tuning, press STOP to compete tuning. The system automatically
calculates the best gain value.
 Gain calculation (COMPUTE): to change the parameter values of rigidity, bandwidth, or

inertia to accommodate the machine characteristics, you can use this function to calculate
and generate the results of gain tuning. The operation steps for calculating the gain value of
a single axis are as follows.
9-25
(4) Press and to move the cursor to the fields of Rigidity, BW, and JL/Jm to set the
parameters.
(5) Press COMPUTE to calculate the tuning results.
9  Gain value writing (WR GAIN), resonance value writing (WR NOTH): the system automatically
calculates the gain values after auto tuning is finished and the motion stops. If the values after
auto tuning meet the expectation, you can use these functions to write the new parameter
values to the servo. The operation steps are as follows.
(4) After tuning, the results are automatically calculated.
(5) Press WR GAIN to write the corresponding gain parameters to the servo.
Press WR NOTH to write the new parameter values for resonance suppression to the
servo.
Note:
1. You have to write the results of auto tuning to the servo for the values to take effect.
2. After writing the gain values and resonance values, the servo parameters are updated and the
previous settings cannot be restored. Thus, double check before writing the values.
 Calibration for tapping (TAP RIV): in tapping applications, calibrate the machine and servo
with this function.
If you use Delta servo products for the spindle, the operation steps for TAP SET(1) are as
follows.
(4) Complete the gain tuning for the servo axes X, Y, and Z, and the spindle.
(5) Press to switch to the function bar on the last page.
(6) Press TAP RIV to switch to the corresponding screen.
(7) Press TAP SET(1) and a confirmation window appears. Enter “Y” and press ENTER to
complete calibrating the machine for tapping applications.
If you use Delta AC inverter or servo products of other brands for the spindle, the operation
steps for TAP SET(2) are as follows.
(4) Complete the gain tuning for the servo axes X, Y, and Z, and the spindle.
(5) Press to switch to the function bar on the last page.
(6) Press TAP RIV to switch to the corresponding screen.
9-26
(7) Press TAP SET(2) and a confirmation window appears. Enter “Y” and press ENTER,
then a dialog box appears for you to enter the gain value for spindle control. Enter an
appropriate value and press ENTER, then the system adjusts the tapping setting for the
machine according to the set value.
 Servo parameters (SERVO): for displaying and setting servo parameters in the Servo Tuning
screen. The operation steps are as follows.
9
(4) Repeatedly press to switch to the function bar on the last page.
(5) Press SRV MON to display the servo parameter screen.
(6) Move the cursor to the field of the parameter to be edited, enter the value, and press
ENTER to complete the setting.
9.8 Import (IMPORT)

With the proper authorization, you can use this function to import the backup parameters to the
NC system. The operation steps for importing parameters are as follows.
(3) Press IMPORT to display the file manager (FILE) window as shown in Figure 9.8.1. Press
and , select the directory for importing, and press ENTER to read the files in the folder.
Figure 9.8.1
(4) After entering the parameter selection screen, press , , , and to move the cursor
to the system parameter to be imported, and press ENTER to select or clear the check box.
(5) To select all the check boxes, press SEL ALL. To clear all the selected check boxes, press
CLR ALL.
9-27
9
Figure 9.8.2
(6) Press IMPORT and a dialog box appears for confirmation. Enter “Y” and press ENTER to
import the data of the files to the system. Then, the screen displays a progress bar showing
the importing process. Cycle power to the system after completing importing the files.
Figure 9.8.3
9.9 Export (EXPORT)

Use this function to back up the parameters of the system. The exported files are divided into
three types: parameter files, MLC, and software panel. You need to have the proper authorization
to use this function.
Type Filename Description

Parameter files PAR.ncp NC information, servo parameters, and alarms
MLC MLC.gmc MLC programs
MLC MLC.lad Image codes for MLC Ladder
MLC MLC.lcm Remarks for MLC Ladder
Software panel HMI.cin Screen information and element properties for software panel
Software panel HMI.img Graphic files for software panel
Software panel HMI.sci Project files for software panel
9-28
The operation steps for exporting parameters are as follows.

(3) Press EXPORT to enter the parameter selection screen.
(4) After entering the parameter selection screen, press , , , and to move the cursor
to the system parameter to be exported, and press ENTER to select or clear the check box.
To select all the check boxes, press SEL ALL. To clear all the selected check boxes, press
9
CLR ALL.
Figure 9.9.1
(5) Press EXPORT and the file manager (FILE) window appears as shown in Figure 9.9.2.
Press and to select the directory for saving the exported files, or directly enter the
folder name and press ENTER to save the exported files to the specified folder.
Figure 9.9.2
(6) Then, the screen displays a progress bar showing the exporting process until the exporting is
finished.
(7) If you want to save the exported file to a new created folder, name the folder, then press
FOLDER to save the exported file in the folder, as shown in Figure 9.9.2.
(8) If you save the exported file to a folder where an exported file already exists, a confirmation
window appears as shown in Figure 9.9.3. Enter “Y” and press ENTER to replace the
existing file with the newly exported file.
9-29
9
Figure 9.9.3
9.10 Multi-language (TEXT WR)

The default display languages for the group screens and corresponding function bars are
Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese, and English. If there is a need for other languages, use
this function to switch the interface to other languages. Contact the distributors or equipment
suppliers for related information.
9.11 LOGO (LOGO WR)

Use this function to set the startup screen of the NC system with user-defined pictures for
displaying the trademark or for other purposes. This function is available only when you have the
proper authorization. The operation steps are as follows.
(2) Repeatedly press to display the function bar on the last page.
(3) Insert the USB disk with the correct system startup screen file (SYSLOGO.bin) in it to the
controller.
(4) Press LOGO WR and a dialog box appears for confirmation.
(5) Enter “Y”, press OK, and the system automatically reads and loads the startup screen file
from the USB disk.
(6) After the file is updated, restart the system to display the updated startup screen.
9-30
Alarm (ALM) Group
The ALM group displays the alarm messages issued by the system in real time.
10.1 Alarm (ALARM) ············································································· 10-2

10.2 Alarm history (HISTORY) ································································ 10-3
10-1
Alarm (ALM) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual
If an alarm occurs due to execution error or incorrect command format, the Alarm screen is
automatically displayed. This group shows the alarm messages issued by the system in real time
for you to troubleshoot the errors according to the displayed alarm information. In addition to
10 displaying the current alarms, the ALM group also records the previous alarms.
10.1 Alarm (ALARM)

When an alarm occurs, troubleshoot the issue first, and then press RESET to clear the alarm
and set the system to the initial status. The alarm display screen is as shown in the following
figure and the sections with indicators show information about the alarms.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Figure 10.1.1
(1) Alarm message
(2) Sequence of alarm occurrence
(3) Alarm code
The operation steps for displaying and clearing the alarm messages are as follows.
(1) Press ALM to enter the ALM screen.
(2) Press ALARM to enter the alarm message screen.
(3) Press RESET to clear the alarm messages shown on the screen.
10-2
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Alarm (ALM) Group
10.2 Alarm history (HISTORY)

This function records all the issued alarm messages and history information. In the History
10
screen, you can access the error history during system execution as well as troubleshoot and
analyze the errors according to the occurrence time and types of alarms. The alarm history
records the occurrence time and names of the alarms. It can record up to 512 sets of data.
In addition to displaying the alarm information, you can also delete the alarm history with this
function.
Figure 10.2.1
The operation steps for clearing all the alarm history are as follows.
(1) Press ALM to enter the ALM screen.
(2) Press HISTORY to enter the alarm history screen.
(3) Press CLR ALL and a confirmation window appears.
(4) Press Y and then ENTER to clear all the alarm history.
10-3
Alarm (ALM) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual
10
10-4
Graph (GRA) Group
The GRA group displays the real-time motion trajectory when the program is executing
or checks the machining program when the program is not executing.
11.1 Trajectory display············································································ 11-2

11.2 Program simulation (Preview) ···························································· 11-3
11-1
Graph (GRA) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual
The GRA group provides two functions, trajectory display and program simulation.
Trajectory display: displays the real-time motion trajectory during machining.
11
Program simulation: checks the accuracy of the program format and machining path before
machining.
11.1 Trajectory display

When a machining program is executing, switch the system to GRA mode, and the system
automatically draws the motion trajectory of the current program on the screen, with which you
can check if the actual machining path is correct.
Function descriptions of the keys are as follows.

(1) GRA: enters the GRA screen.
(2) CENT SET: displays the current motion trajectory in the center of the display area.
(3) WIN RST: scales the graph to a moderate size and locates it in the middle of the screen.
(4) WIN SET: press UP, DOWN, LEFT, RIGHT, ZM IN, and ZM OUT in the WIN SET screen to
adjust the display of the path graph.
(5) CLEAR: clears the content in the display area.
11-2
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Graph (GRA) Group
11.2 Program simulation (Preview)

This function draws the complete path of the G-code program for you to check if the program
11
format is correct before the machining starts. This function can be further divided into GRAPHIC
and PREVIEW.
Function descriptions of the keys are as follows.
(1) GRA: enters the GRA screen.
(2) CENT SET: displays the current motion trajectory in the center of the display area.
(3) WIN RST: scales the graph to a moderate size and locates it in the middle of the screen.
(4) WIN SET: press UP, DOWN, LEFT, RIGHT, ZM IN, and ZM OUT in the WIN SET screen to
adjust the display of the path graph.
(5) PV(STEP): draws the path of a single block for each press of the key.
(6) GRAPHIC: checks the program format without referring to the software limit and draws the
complete path according to the program.
(7) PREVIEW: checks the program format by referring to the software limit. The settings of the
coordinate system and the tool compensation should match the actual application so the
complete path can be correctly drawn.
(8) CLEAR: clears the content in the display area.
11-3
Graph (GRA) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual
Pay attention to the following when using the functions of GRA:

 When the Preview function is enabled, machining execution is prohibited.
 When the Preview function is enabled, switching the system mode will force close this
11 
function.
If you cancel the preview during previewing, you need to start from the initial block if desiring
to preview again.
 Graphs drawn by the function of GRAPHIC or PREVIEW may exceed the display area
because of the setting values of the workpiece coordinate. If so, press GRAPHIC or
PREVIEW again, and the system automatically displays a moderate preview graph in the
center of the display area.
 The Preview function in the lathe system only displays graphs from the angle of view of the
X-Z plane.
 Use the graphic parameter Pr14003 to set the default display of the graph.
11-4
Parameter (PAR) Group
This chapter introduces functions and settings for all of the parameters.
12
本
12.1 Machining parameter (PROCESS) ····················································· 12-3

12.1.1 Machining parameter descriptions ··············································· 12-4
12.2 Operating parameter (OPERATE) ······················································ 12-9
12.2.1 Operating parameter descriptions ···············································12-10
12.3 Tool magazine parameter (MAGA) ····················································12-20
12.3.1 Tool magazine parameter descriptions ·········································12-21
12.4 Spindle parameter (SPINDLE) ·························································12-22
12.4.1 Spindle parameter descriptions ··················································12-23
12.5 Machine parameter (MACHINE) ·······················································12-29
12.5.1 Machine parameter descriptions·················································12-30
12.6 Homing parameter (HOME)·····························································12-32
12.6.1 Homing parameter descriptions··················································12-33
12.7 Ethernet setting (ETH.) ··································································12-37
12.7.1 Ethernet parameter descriptions·················································12-38
12.8 Compensation parameter (COMP) ····················································12-39
12.8.1 Compensation parameter descriptions ·········································12-40
12.9 System parameter (SYSTEM) ··························································12-43
12.9.1 System parameter descriptions ················································12-44
12.10 MLC setting (MLC) ······································································12-50
12.10.1 MLC parameter descriptions ····················································12-51
12.11 Graph parameter (GRAPHIC) ························································12-54
12.11.1 Graph parameter descriptions ··················································12-55
12.12 Servo parameter (SERVO) ····························································12-56
12.12.1 Servo parameter descriptions ··················································12-57
12.13 Channel setting (CONFIG) ····························································12-60
12.14 RIO setting (SET RIO) ··································································12-61
12.14.1 Details of RIO setting ·····························································12-62
12.14.2 Setting DAC module (NC-EIO-DAC04) ······································12-63
12.15 Search (SEARCH) ·······································································12-64
12.16 Parameter group (PAR GRP) ·························································12-64
12.17 Other settings ·············································································12-66
12.17.1 Setting for absolute motor ·······················································12-66
12-1
Parameter (PAR) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual
12.17.2 Setting synchronous motion control ···········································12-68

12.17.3 Command transfer ·································································12-71
12
12-2
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Parameter (PAR) Group
Parameters in the PAR group can be divided into operation parameters, tool magazine
parameters, machining parameters, spindle parameters, machine parameters, homing
12
parameters, compensation parameters, and system parameters according to their functions.
The timing for parameters to take effect is divided into three types according to their properties:
after cycling power to the servo drive (S), after cycling power to the system (P), or after pressing
RESET (R).
Note:
1. Bold function names in a box (such as POS) mean the keys on machine operation panel A; bold
2. In the PAR screen, enter “S + parameter number” and you are directed to the specified parameter
immediately.
12.1 Machining parameter (PROCESS)

Machining parameters such as maximum cutting speed, and cutting and smoothing acceleration
and deceleration time can have prominent effects on the machining results. Properly set the
values according to the actual requirements to achieve the best performance. The operation
(1) Press PAR to enter the PAR screen.
(2) Press PROCESS to enter the machining parameter setting screen.
(3) Press and to move the cursor to the specified field, and enter a value within the
range specified in the lower right corner of the screen as shown in Figure 12.1.1.
(4) Press ENTER to complete the setting.
Figure 12.1.1
12-3
12.1.1 Machining parameter descriptions
Para-
Default Setting
meter Item Description Note
12
value range
No.
During circular interpolation, the arc path shifts
inward because of the delayed following of the
servo. With the shift amount fixed, you can set
Arc cutting reference the maximum feedrate of the arc radius with
309 1000 10 - 50000 R
feedrate this parameter. The higher the parameter
value, the greater the shift amount and the
lower the machining precision, and vice versa.
Unit: mm/min
Sets the minimum feedrate for executing
circular interpolation. The higher the feedrate,
Min. arc reference
310 the less precise the machining and the more 500 10 - 50000 R
feedrate
the contouring error, while it shortens the
machining time. Unit: mm/min
Sets the speed limit at corners. The higher the
value, the easier to keep the high speed at
corners for restoring to the feedrate before
deceleration. Setting the value too high or
improper setting may cause vibration of the
machine at the corners. Unit: mm/min
Max. corner
311 100 0 - 50000 R
reference feedrate
The default cutting depth for executing

G71/G72 turning cycle. Refer to the cutting
depth d in the following path diagram of G71
turning cycle.
Cutting depth in
312 1000 0 - 50000 R
G71/G72
12-4
Para-
Default Setting
value range
No.
The default retract amount for executing
12
G71/G72 turning cycle. Refer to the retract
amount e in the following path diagram of G71
turning cycle.
Retract amount in
313 1000 0 - 50000 R
G71/G72
Sets the default cutting speed. When you set

this parameter without specifying the F value in
Default cutting
314 the cutting command, the cutting speed is the 0 0 - 20000 P
feedrate
value set by this parameter.
Unit: mm/min, inch/min
Sets the feedrate for rapid traverse when the
315 G00 feedrate at 0% rapid traverse override is set to 0%. 100 10 - 10000 R
Sets the maximum speed for RAPID mode and
316 G00 feedrate G00. 5000 1 - 60000 R
G00 ACC/DEC time Sets the acceleration and deceleration time for
317 200 1 - 2000 R
constant rapid traverse. Unit: msec
Sets the maximum cutting feedrate.
318 Max. cutting feedrate 5000 1 - 60000 R
Sets the acceleration and deceleration time for
Cutting ACC/DEC cutting speed. Unit: msec
319 200 1 - 2000 R
time constant (acceleration and deceleration time before
interpolation)
Sets the S-curve time for cutting speed.
Cutting S-curve time Unit: msec
320 20 1 - 2000 R
constant (acceleration and deceleration time before
interpolation)
Sets the post acceleration and deceleration
Cutting post time for cutting speed. The higher the value,
321 ACC/DEC time the more the contouring error. Unit: msec 50 1 - 500 R
constant (acceleration and deceleration time after
interpolation)
The time required for accelerating or
decelerating to the target speed when
threading.
Target speed = number of revolution / min x
Threading post
thread pitch
322 ACC/DEC time 10 1 - 100 R
constant The smaller the parameter value, the shorter
the ineffective threads, but the vibration is more
violent. The greater the parameter value, the
longer the ineffective threads, but the vibration
is less violent.
12-5
Para-
Default Setting
value range
No.
12
When the circular path is specified in center
323 Arc radius tolerance format (I, J, K), the controller calculates the 1 1 - 60000 R
radius R1 (the distance from the start point to
the circle center) and the radius R2 (the
distance from the end point to the circle
center). The absolute difference between R1
and R2 should be smaller than Pr323 (|R1-R2| <
Pr323), or alarm B00D Radius mismatch
occurs.
Unit: μm
When the system performs curve fitting, if the
block length of G01 exceeds the setting in
Max. block length of Pr329, the curve fitting for the block is
329 20 0 - 10000 R
path smoothing automatically canceled and the linear
interpolation remains effective.
Unit: 0.1 mm
When the angle specified by a single block
exceeds the angle of curve fitting, the curve
Min. corner angle of
330 fitting for the corner is automatically canceled 15 0 - 90 R
path smoothing
and the sharpness is kept.
Unit: degree
Cosine error for curve fitting. The greater the
value, the smoother the curve. But if the
tolerance is set too great, the more the
contouring error. The smaller the value, the
more likely the machining contour is close to
Contour tolerance of the programmed path for linear interpolation,
333 100 0 - 50000 R
path smoothing but the curve is less smooth. It is suggested
that the parameter value and the error value
set in the CAM software should be consistent
so as to make the path smoother without
affecting the precision.
Unit: 0.0001 mm
Sets the radius for the rotation axis. The
greater the value, the slower the rotation speed
and vice versa.
When you set Pr344 to 0, this function is
disabled and the rotation axis feedrate is
determined by the F value (deg/min).
When you set Pr344 to a non-zero value, the
system defines this value as the radius of the
rotation axis to calculate the arc length, and
performs interpolation based on the arc length.
Radius of rotation
344 Meanwhile, the feedrate for the rotation axis is 0 0 - 65535 R
axis
determined by the F value (mm/min).
θ
𝐴𝑟𝑐 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ (𝑚𝑚) = 𝑅π
180
12-6
Para-
Default Setting
value range
No.
The default unit of feedrate for linear axes is
12
mm/min and that for the rotation axis is
deg/min.
If the rotation axis used in the application
requires the feedrate to be consistent with the
tangential velocity (mm/min), you can set Pr344
Radius of rotation
344 with the setting value as close as the distance 0 0 - 65535 R
axis
between the cutting point and the rotation
center (rotation radius).
The smaller the value of Pr344, the faster the
cutting speed; the greater the value of Pr344,
the slower the cutting speed.
Unit: 0.1 mm
Default cutting amount in X-axis direction for
executing G73 turning cycle. Refer to the
following G73 turning cycle path for the cutting
amount i in X-axis direction.
X axis cutting depth

345 1000 0 - 50000 R
in G73
Default cutting amount in Z-axis direction for

executing G73 turning cycle. Refer to the
following G73 turning path for the cutting
amount k in Z-axis direction.
Z axis cutting depth

346 1000 0 - 50000 R
in G73
Number of cutting Default cutting times for executing G73 turning

347 3 1 - 99 R
times in G73 cycle.
12-7
Para-
Default Setting
value range
No.
The default retract amount e for executing
12
G74/G75 peck turning cycle.
Retract amount in
348 1000 0 - 50000 R
G74/G75
Chamfering angle θ for executing G76/G92

thread turning cycle.
Chamfering angle in
349 45 1 - 89 R
G76/G92 threading
Chamfering length r for executing G76/G92

thread turning cycle. Chamfering length =
parameter value x (0.1 x thread pitch).
Chamfering length in
380 Assume the pitch is L, then the chamfering 3 0 - 127 R
G76/G92 threading
length for thread turning can be 0L - 12.7L.
(refer to the figure in Pr349 column for the
length of r)
Finishing count in Finishing count for executing G76 thread
381 1 1 - 99 R
G76 threading turning cycle.
Tool nose angle in Tool nose angle for executing G76 thread
382 60 0 - 80 R
G76 threading turning cycle.
Min. cutting depth in Minimum cutting depth for executing G76
383 1000 0 - 50000 R
G76 threading thread turning cycle.
Sets the number of blocks to check in tool
Block No. to check in compensation interference:
510 tool comp. 0 0-3 P
Pr510 = 0: number of blocks = 3
interference
Pr510 < 3: number of blocks = Pr510
Sets the acceleration and deceleration S-curve
G00 S-curve time
511 for the G00 movement. 1 0 - 2000 R
constant
Unit: msec
Finishing allowance Finishing allowance for executing G76 thread
515 200 0 - 50000 R
in G76 threading turning cycle.
12-8
12.2 Operating parameter (OPERATE)

You can use macro programs to perform mathematical operations, logical statement, and
12
repeated program call to increase flexibility in program editing for G-code execution. You
can set whether to execute specified macro programs in the Operation screen. The
(2) Press OPERATE to enter the operating parameter setting screen.
(3) Press , , , and to move the cursor to the specified field and enter a valid value
within the range displayed in the lower right corner of the screen as shown in Figure 12.2.1.
Figure 12.2.1
12-9
12.2.1 Operating parameter descriptions

Para-
Default Setting
12
value range
No.
G-code macro call-O9010
Set these parameters to 0 to disable macro
call.
G-code macro call -
3 - 12 G-code macro call-O9014 0 0 - 1000 R
O9010 to O9019
M-code macro call-O9020
Set these parameters to 0 to disable macro
call.
M-code macro call -
13 - 22 M-code macro call-O9024 0 0 - 1000 R
O9020 to O9029
T-code macro call - T-code macro call-O9000
23 0 0-1 R
O9000 0: off; 1: on
Call O9030 after break line search.
0: function disabled. After finding the break
line, the system continues executing the
program without calling a macro.
Call O9030 after 1: function enabled. After finding the break
24 0 0-1 R
break line search line, the system first calls and executes
O9030 once CYCLE START is pressed,
and then it returns to the main program and
carries on the machining program followed
by the breakpoint.
Sets G31 input polarity.
0: NC; 1: NO
25 System DIO setting Bit Function Range 0 0-1 P
0 G31 high speed input point 1 0-1
1 G31 high speed input point 2 0-1
Bit Function Range
Output control mode
0-1 0
0: DMCNET
Homing before machining
System application 2 0-1
46 0: Y; 1: N 96 0 - 0xFFFF P
setting
Screw unit
4 0-1
0: metric; 1: imperial
G31 high speed input 1 switch
5 0-1
0: off; 1: on
12-10
Para-
Default Setting
value range
No.
Bit Function Range
12
G31 high speed input 2 switch
6 0-1
0: off; 1: on
Hardware limit check
7 0-1
0: on; 1: off
Software limit check
8 0-1
0: on; 1: off
Omit decimal places of the
floating point number in the
motion command
0: do not omit
10 (example: input 1 to indicate 0-1
1 μm)
1: omit
(example: input 1 to indicate
1 mm)
G00 operation mode
0: multiple axes perform
System application synchronous interpolation and
46 reach the positioning point at 96 0 - 0xFFFF P
setting
11 the same time 0-1
1: each axis performs individual
interpolation and reaches the
positioning point separately at
different speeds
Macro look-ahead
12 0-1
0: off; 1: on
G00 path blending mode
0: same axis
1: different axes
13 0-1
The greater the setting value of
Pr334, the larger the chamfer
angle of the path.
Return mode of one-key macro
call
14 0-1
0: go to the next line
1: return to the interrupted line
Pre-warning for software limit
15 0-1
0: off; 1: on
MPG filter gain. For setting the MPG
response. The greater the value, the faster the
47 MGP gain response, but the machine is subject to 100 1 - 60000 R
vibration.
Unit: 0.0001
Sets the MPG filter level.
0: disabled
48 MPG filter 0 0-6 R
Level 1 2 3 4 5 6
kHz 31 10 5 2.5 1.6 1.2
0: the 4th
axis include both limit and origin
signals
49 Axis port input setting 1: changes the positive limit signal, negative 0 0-1 R
limit signal, and origin signal of the 4th axis
to the origin signals of the 4th, 5th, and 6th
axes.
Bit Function Range
50 Macro file display 0 Display O macro file 0-1 0 0-3 -
1 Display G/M macro file 0-1
12-11
Para-
Default Setting
value range
No.
12
Bit Function Range
Spindle check before cutting:
when this function is enabled,
if a cutting command is
0 executed but the spindle is not 0-1
in operation, the system
displays an alarm.
0: off; 1: on
Non-volatile setting for
1 #10450 - #10500 0-1
0: on; 1: off
G54 - G59 offset coordinate
4 switch 0-1
0: off; 1: on
Stroke protection
5 0-1
0: off; 1: on
1st spindle OA/OB signal
6 sequence 0-1
0: AB; 1: BA
51 System auxiliary tool 0 0-1 P
Spindle speed percentage
8 reference during threading 0-1
0: set percentage; 1: 100%
Spindle target speed check
9 during cutting 0-1
0: off; 1: on
Return mode after triggering
M96
10 0-1
0: go to the next line;
1: return to the interrupted line
Tapping mode
11 0-1
0: open-loop; 1: following
G98 / G99 default setting
12 0-1
0: program; 1: Pr306
MPG reverse function
14 0-1
0: off; 1: on
Feedback check
15 0-1
0: on; 1: off
Unit setting for coordinate display. For
example, when you set this parameter to 3,
301 Unit decimal places the coordinates are displayed with three 3 0-4 P
decimal places, such as -99999.999 to
99999.999.
Bit Function Range
EMG stop source
5 0-1
0: system; 1: M1079
G00 / G01 transition speed
Channel auxiliary 0: to zero speed
305 6 0-1 0 362 P
setting 1: no deceleration (refers to
Pr334)
Record machine
coordinates after triggering
8 0-1
HSI
0: command; 1: feedback
Bit Function Range
Default unit
0 0-1
G-code programming 0: metric; 1: imperial
306 Default programming mode 532 0 - 0xFFFF P
parameter 1 0-1
0: absolute; 1: incremental
Default feed mode
2 0-1
0: feed/min; 1: feed/rev
12-12
Para-
Default Setting
value range
No.
Bit Function Range
12
Default plane
4-5 0-2
0: G17; 1: G18; 2: G19
Lathe G-code type
G-code programming 9 - 10 0: A; 1: B; 2: C 0-3
306 532 0 - 0xFFFF P
parameter Set the X axis to diameter /
11 raidus mode 0-1
0: diameter; 1: radius
Default workpiece coordinates
13 - 15 0-5
0 - 5: G54 - G59
Bit Function Range
Tool length compensation mode
0: when the block has a tool
length compensation execution
or cancellation command
without a Z-axis command, Z
0 axis moves. 0-1
1: when the block has a tool
length compensation execution
or cancellation command
without a Z-axis command, Z
axis does not move.
Spindle speed after reset
0: command speed remains after
1 reset 0-1
1: command speed becomes 0
after reset
Software limit check mode
2 0: program path; 1: tool path 0-1
(compensated)
Tool length input mode
3 0-1
0: absolute; 1: incremental
G31 input source
0; off; 1: HSI 1 (latch input 1);
4-5 0-1
2: HSI 2 (latch input 2);
3: HSI 1 & 2
Running mode after interruption
0: during the execution of a
Channel application block, if you manually move
307 the tool from its original 0xD4 0 - 0xFFFF P
setting
position and then resumes the
program execution, the tool
moves the remaining distance
first and then returns to the
original path in the next motion
block, as shown in the
following figure.
6 0-1
1: during the execution of a

block, if you manually move
the tool from its original
position and then resumes the
program execution, the tool
returns to the original path first
and then moves the remaining
distance, as shown in the
following figure.
12-13
Para-
Default Setting
value range
No.
Bit Function Range
12
EMG stop mode
0: after the controller stops, the
servo switches to Servo Off
8-9 servo decelerates to a stop 0-2
and switches to Servo Off
servo decelerates to a stop
and remains Servo On
MLC variable type
0: word type
1: double word type
10 Set this bit to 1 to change the 0-1
interface input / output registers
to 8 sets (32-bit) from 16 sets
(16-bit).
G00/G01 max. feedrate
reference
0: resultant velocity
Channel application G00: Pr316 & Pr621
307 11 0-1 0xD4 0 - 0xFFFF P
setting G01: Pr318 & Pr625
1: individual velocity
G00: Pr621
G01: Pr625
Return mode after interruption
0: G00; 1: G01
You can use this parameter to
restore the motion mode when
the machining was interrupted
in the following condition: you
12 0-1
press FEED HOLD during
machining, set the system to
MDI mode, move the machine,
and then set the system back to
AUTO mode and resume the
machining without resetting.
Synchronous execution for M /
14 S / T-code and G00 0-1
0: off; 1: on
Cancel tool radius
15 compensation for G00 block 0-1
0: off; 1: on
Bit Function Range
Feedrate reference
0 0-1
0: program; 1: Pr314
Local variable NULL function
1 0: off, #1 - #50 are 0 0-1
1: on, #1 - #50 are null
Current monitoring function
2 0-1
0: off; 1: on
Tool compensation interference
4 check 0-1
0: on; 1: off
Motion speed remains when
Channel auxiliary 5 coordinates switch 0-1
308 0: off; 1: on 0 0 - 0xFFFF P
setting
Motion speed remains when
6 macro call 0-1
0: off; 1: on
Pause before running M99
9 0-1
0: off; 1: on
ABS coordinate changes after
11 tool length / wear modification 0-1
0: remain; 1: change
Tool length compensation after
12 M30 / M02 / RST / Bootup 0-1
0: cancel; 1: maintain
Tool number display mode
13 0-1
0: G-code; 1: D1115
12-14
Para-
Default Setting
value range
No.
Bit Function Range
12
Channel auxiliary Feed/rev mode reference
308 14 0-1 0 0 - 0xFFFF P
setting 0: command; 1: feedback
C axis mode
15 0-1
0: turning; 1: lathe
Peck-drilling escape Sets the retract amount for performing peck
324 100 1 - 50000 R
amount drilling. Unit: μm
Bit Function Range
Tool withdraw direction (for
0-1 G76 / G87 cycle command) 0-3
0: +X; 1: -X; 2: +Y; 3: -Y
Drilling / tapping mode
0: general
326 Cycle parameter 1: deep-pecking (feed amount 0 0 - 0xFFFF R
= Q, retract amount = R)
2-3 2: pecking (feed amount = Q, 0-3
retract amount = D)
3: deep-pecking (feed amount
= Q, retract amount = R,
dwell time = Pr513)
Sets the time for the servo motor to decelerate
EMG stop time
327 to zero speed when the emergency stop is 50 5 - 500 R
constant
pressed in AUTO mode. Unit: msec
Sets the delay time for the special M relay
M2114 System emergency stop when the
328 EMG stop delay time 35 0 - 2000 R
system is stopped and in Servo Off status.
Unit: msec
The speed does not decelerate to zero when
G00 is executed between blocks. Use this
parameter to set the blending ratio. The
greater the value, the less the deceleration at
334 G00 blending ratio 0 0 - 100 R
block transitions and the faster the speed; the
smaller the value, the more the deceleration at
block transitions and the slower the speed.
Unit: %
Halt M-code 1
0: disabled
Halt M-code 2
Halt M-code 3
350 - Halt M-code 4
Halt M-code 1 - 8 0 0 - 1000 P
357
Halt M-code 5
Halt M-code 6
Halt M-code 7
Halt M-code 8
Spindle > C axis M-code for switching the spindle to C axis for
358 mode switch M-code the lathe system. This M-code can be used as 0 0 - 1000 P
(lathe) a halt M-code.
C axis > Spindle M-code for switching the C axis to spindle for
359 mode switch M-code the lathe system. This M-code can be used as 0 0 - 1000 P
(lathe) a halt M-code.
12-15
Para-
Default Setting
value range
No.
Sets the synchronization direction.
12
Bit 0 - 5: synchronous control of X - C axes
0: same direction
1: different directions
Synchronization Bit Function Range
360 0 Synchronous direction for X axis 0-1 0 0 - 0x3F P
direction control
1 Synchronous direction for Y axis 0-1
2 Synchronous direction for Z axis 0-1
3 Synchronous direction for A axis 0-1
4 Synchronous direction for B axis 0-1
5 Synchronous direction for C axis 0-1
Specifies the master axis when the X axis is
the slave axis. For example, set this
Synchronous control
361 parameter to 2 if desiring to set the Y axis as 0 0-6 P
X
the master axis for synchronous control.
0: disabled; 1 - 6: X - C
Specifies the master axis when the Y axis is
Synchronous control
362 the slave axis. 0 0-6 P
Y
Specifies the master axis when the Z axis is
Synchronous control
Z
Specifies the master axis when the A axis is
Synchronous control
A
Specifies the master axis when the B axis is
Synchronous control
B
Specifies the master axis when the C axis is
Synchronous control
C
12-16
Para-
Default Setting
value range
No.
Sets the transfer direction.
12
Bit 0 - 5: transfer direction of X - C axes
0: same direction
Bit Function Range
Transfer control
370 0 Transfer direction X 0-1 0 0 - 0x3F P
direction
1 Transfer direction Y 0-1
2 Transfer direction Z 0-1
3 Transfer direction A 0-1
4 Transfer direction B 0-1
5 Transfer direction C 0-1
Specifies the X axis as the axis to receive the
transfer command. When transfer control
function is enabled, the command is
transferred to have the X axis move while the
371 Transfer control X originally commanded axis does not move. 0 0-6 P
For example, set this parameter to 2 if
desiring to transfer the control command from
the Y axis.
Specifies the Y axis as the axis to receive the
372 Transfer control Y 0 0-6 P
transferred to have the Y axis move while the
originally commanded axis does not move.
Specifies the Z axis as the axis to receive the
373 Transfer control Z 0 0-6 P
transferred to have the Z axis move while the
Specifies the A axis as the axis to receive the
374 Transfer control A 0 0-6 P
transferred to have the A axis move while the
Specifies the B axis as the axis to receive the
375 Transfer control B 0 0-6 P
transferred to have the B axis move while the
Specifies the C axis as the axis to receive the
376 Transfer control C 0 0-6 P
transferred to have the C axis move while the
12-17
Para-
Default Setting
value range
No.
The polygon cutting operation requires one
12
spindle and one rotation axis. Use this
Polygon cutting axis
508 parameter to set the rotation axis (tool axis) to 0 0, 4 - 6 P
setting
use.
0: off; 4 - 6: A - C
Torque limit for each servo axis; Bit 0 indicates
Torque limit for each X axis, Bit 1 indicates Y axis, Bit 2 indicates Z
509 0 0 - 65535 P
axis axis, and so on. For example, to enable the
torque limit of X and Z axes, set Pr509 to 5.
Drilling/tapping cycle In drilling / tapping mode, set Pr326 to 3 and
513 dwell time above hole refer to the setting of this parameter as the 0 0 - 50000 R
bottom dwell time at the top of the hole.
After the system issues a command, when the
time set by Pr514 passes while the feedback
514 Feedback check time 0 0 - 65535 R
value remains the same, alarm 4FFD occurs.
Unit: ms
Bit Function Range
Origin / limit planning
14 0-1
0: off; 1: on
2006 Input source setup 0 0 - 49152 P
EMG stop source
15 0: IES 0-1
1: HSI on OPENCNC
Bit Function Range
0 HSI 1 trigger setting 0-1
High speed input
2010 1 HSI 2 trigger setting 0-1 0 0 - 65535 P
trigger setting
Sets to 0 means rising-edge triggering; sets
to 1 means falling-edge triggering.
PMC module output setting
0: general (servo)
1: bridge (command = feedback)
Bit Function Range
st
0 1 axis feedback source 0-1
1 2nd axis feedback source 0-1
2 3rd axis feedback source 0-1
th
4 5th axis feedback source 0-1
th
PMC module output
2049 6 7th axis feedback source 0-1 0 0 - 65535 P
setting
th
11 12 axis feedback source 11
Pulse command type
12 - 13 0: A/B phase 0-2
1: CW/CCW
2: Pulse/direction
Pulse logic
14 0-1
0: positive; 1: negative
12-18
Para-
Default Setting
value range
No.
1st PMC encoder
12
2050 resolution (single- The motor single-frequency pulse number. 0 0 - 65535 P
phase)
2nd PMC encoder
phase)
3rd PMC encoder
phase)
4th PMC encoder
phase)
5th PMC encoder
phase)
6th PMC encoder
phase)
7th PMC encoder
phase)
8th PMC encoder
phase)
9th PMC encoder
phase)
10th PMC encoder
phase)
G00/manual Sets the maximum speed.
621 5000 0 - 60000 R
maximum speed Unit: mm/min, inch/min, rpm
G00/manual Sets the acceleration or deceleration time.
622 50 0 - 10000 R
ACC/DEC time Unit: msec
G00/manual S-curve
623 Sets the time constant for S-curve. Unit: msec 5 1 - 2000 R
time
Sets the maximum speed for G01.
625 G01 maximum speed 0 0 - 60000 R
Unit: mm/min, inch/min, rpm
During synchronous control, if the following
error between the master and slaves exceeds
Synchronous
642 the value set by this parameter, B645 50 0 - 1000 R
tolerance
Excessive synchronous following error occurs.
Unit: 0.1 mm
If the following error exceeds the setting in
Feedback following any movement, an alarm occurs. This
643 30000 1 - 60000 R
error parameter is for setting the tolerance for the
servo following command. Unit: 0.001 mm
When starting, the system checks the error
Feedback position between the command and the feedback from
648 20 1 - 6000 R
check after bootup servo. If the error exceeds the setting, the
servo cannot switch to Servo on.
12-19
12.3 Tool magazine parameter (MAGA)

Tool magazine parameters are for enabling magazine-related functions. With these parameters,
12
you can specify the type and number of magazines and determine whether to enable the tool
magazine functions. Contact the distributors or equipment suppliers for settings of hardware
parameters. The operation steps are as follows.
(2) Press MAGA to enter the tool magazine parameter setting screen.
Figure 12.3.1
12-20
12.3.1 Tool magazine parameter descriptions
Para-
Default Setting
12
value range
No.
Bit Function Range
Spindle tool No. after
magazine reset
10 0
Tool magazine 0: 0
336 1: continue numbering 0x0800 0 - 65535 P
control
Types of ATC
11 0: exchange arm 0-1
1: disk
Bit Function Range
Tool magazine 1
0: off (tool magazine data table
Tool magazine 0 is not updated instantly) 0-1
337 1: on (tool magazine data table 1 0-3 P
switch is updated instantly)
Tool magazine 2
1 0: off 0-1
1: on
Sets the number of tool stations of tool
magazine 1 (in response to the mechanical
Tool magazine 1
338 differences of tool magazines, you need to set 10 2 - 255 P
total tool No.
the number of the placeable tools with this
parameter).
Tool magazine 1
Sets the standby tool pocket number when the
339 standby tool No. 1 1 - 100 P
reset function is used for tool magazine 1.
after reset
Sets the tool number of the start tool pocket
Tool magazine 1
340 when the reset function is used for tool 1 1 - 100 P
start tool No.
magazine 1.
Sets the number of tool stations of tool
magazine 2 (in response to the mechanical
Tool magazine 2
341 differences of tool magazines, you need to set 10 2 - 255 P
total tool No.
the number of the placeable tools with this
parameter).
Tool magazine 2
Sets the standby tool pocket number when the
342 standby tool No. 1 1 - 100 P
reset function is used for tool magazine 2.
after reset
Sets the tool number of the start tool pocket
Tool magazine 2
343 when the reset function is used for tool 1 1 - 100 P
start tool No.
magazine 2.
1st DMCNET servo
2012 Supported station numbers are 10 to 12. 0 0 - 65535 P
magazine
2nd DMCNET servo
magazine
3rd DMCNET servo
magazine
12-21
12.4 Spindle parameter (SPINDLE)

Spindle parameters are for setting various spindle functions, such as spindle gain, spindle
12
maximum speed, and spindle positioning tolerance. The operation steps are as follows.
(2) Press SPINDLE to enter the spindle parameter setting screen.
Figure 12.4.1
12-22
12.4.1 Spindle parameter descriptions
Para-
Default Setting
12
value range
No.
Calibrates the spindle voltage output. When
the controller has the spindle stopped (sets the
Spindle voltage spindle to zero speed), but the spindle is still -1000 to
37 0 R
output offset rotating, set this parameter to adjust the +1000
voltage output to have the spindle come to a
stop. Unit: 0.001V
Spindle default
398 The default spindle speed when power is on. 0 0 - 60000 P
speed
Bit Function Range
Spindle function
0 0: off 0-1
1: on
0: off
1 0-1
1: on (feedback encoder is
required)
Spindle output mode
0: DMCNET (servo spindle)
2-3 0-2
1: reserved
2: EDAC (analog output)
Speed control mode
4 1
1: PUU
Spindle encoder magnification
5 0: 1000 times 0-1
1: 4 times
Analog spindle speed source
7 0: command 0-1
1: encoder
Spindle application Analog spindle feedback

399 encoder source 0 0 - 0xFFFF P
setting 8 0-1
0: spindle
1: motor
Spindle speed reference
9 0: program 0-1
1: Pr398
Spindle Max. speed command
check
11 0-1
0: off
1: on
Spindle speed D1380 display
mode
12 0-1
0: command speed
1: actual speed
Spindle output voltage
(only effective in open-loop
13 control) 0-1
0: -10V to +10V
1: 0V to +10V
Multi-stage spindle feedback
encoder switch
14 0-1
0: off
1: on
Spindle encoder port
401 Sets the feedback channel of spindle encoder. 8 0-8 P
No.
Spindle encoder Sets the encoder resolution (single-phase).
402 1280 2 - 60000 P
resolution Unit: pulse/rev
12-23
Para-
Default Setting
value range
No.
Sets the speed integral gain. The greater the
12
value, the faster the response. But if the gain
403 Spindle integral gain 50 1 - 1000 P
is too large, it may cause machine jitter.
Unit: 0.001 rad/s
Sets the maximum speed for spindle
positioning. If the current speed exceeds the
setting of Pr404, the system decreases the
spindle speed to the speed set in Pr404 and
Spindle high
404 then performs spindle positioning. In addition, 100 1 - 20000 R
positioning speed
if the spindle speed is lower than the setting of
Pr404, it refers to Pr420 Spindle low
positioning speed.
Unit: rpm
Spindle positioning Sets the Z-phase offset for spindle positioning.

405 0 0 - 36000 R
offset Unit: 0.01 degree
Sets the allowable tolerance between the

Spindle target speed
406 target speed and actual speed of the spindle. 10 0 - 300 P
tolerance
Unit: rpm
Sets the spindle positioning tolerance. If the
actual positioning error exceeds the setting,
the spindle positioning fails.
Spindle positioning Positioning error M2258
407 100 0 - 36000 P
tolerance
> Pr407 0
< Pr407 1
Unit: 0.01 degree
If the spindle speed is lower or within the
Spindle zero speed
408 setting, the zero speed signal is on. 5 0 - 1000 P
tolerance
(NC > MLC M2257)
Spindle maximum
409 Sets the maximum speed for spindle. Unit: rpm 20000 0 - 600000 P
speed
Spindle minimum
410 Sets the minimum speed for spindle. Unit: rpm 10 0 - 10000 P
speed

Spindle ACC/DEC the spindle. The greater the value, the longer
411 20 1 - 20000 R
time constant the acceleration and deceleration time.
Unit: msec
Spindle S-curve time Sets the spindle S-curve time constant.

412 10 1 - 2000 R
constant Unit: msec
When the spindle is under closed-loop voltage

control, switch M1127 to instantly change the
spindle Kpp gain.
M1127 Spindle Kpp gain
0 Pr419
413 Spindle 2nd Kpp gain 1 Pr413 0 1 - 1000 R
When the spindle performs positioning at low
speed, it requires higher gain value while high
gain value may lead to vibration during high-
speed rotation. Use D1380 Spindle actual
speed and this parameter to instantly change
the spindle Kpp gain value.
Sets the acceleration and deceleration time of
Tapping ACC/DEC
416 the spindle when it performs tapping. 2000 1 - 20000 R
time constant
Unit: msec
12-24
Para-
Default Setting
value range
No.
Sets the S-curve time constant of the spindle
12
Tapping S-curve time
417 when it performs tapping. 100 1 - 2000 R
constant
Unit: msec
The greater the gain, the less the following
Spindle feedforward error. However, if the value is set too high, it
418 0 0 - 200 R
gain may make the control command less smooth
and cause machinery vibration.
control, use this parameter to adjust the
spindle position loop bandwidth. The greater
the gain, the more precise the positioning.
419 Spindle Kpp gain However, if the value is set too high, it may 0 0 - 1000 R
cause vibration. The parameter value is
relevant to the bandwidth of the inverter. It is
recommended that you start from a lower gain
and then gradually increase the value.
If the current spindle speed is slower than the
setting of Pr404 or is zero, when the system
Spindle low
420 performs spindle positioning, it refers to the 100 1 - 20000
positioning speed R
speed set in this parameter.
Unit: rpm
Tapping retraction setting. The tapping
Tapping retraction retraction speed is F multiply by the value of
421 10 10 - 50 R
speed ratio Pr421.
Unit: 0.1 times
Gear ratio Sets the numerator of the first set of spindle
422 1 0 - 60000 P
numerator 1 gear ratio.
Gear ratio Sets the denominator of the first set of spindle
423 1 0 - 60000 P
denominator 1 gear ratio.
Gear ratio Sets the numerator of the second set of spindle
424 1 0 - 60000 P
Gear ratio Sets the denominator of the second set of
425 1 0 - 60000 P
denominator 2 spindle gear ratio.
Gear ratio Sets the numerator of the third set of spindle
426 1 0 - 60000 P
Gear ratio Sets the denominator of the third set of spindle
427 1 0 - 60000 P
denominator 3 gear ratio.
Gear ratio Sets the numerator of the fourth set of spindle
428 1 0 - 60000 P
Gear ratio Sets the denominator of the fourth set of
429 1 0 - 60000 P
denominator 4 spindle gear ratio.
Bit Function Range
Proximity switch positioning
turn: when using the
Spindle auxiliary positioning function of
437 0 0-3 P
function 0-1 proximity switch, use this 0-3
parameter to set the number
of rotations of the spindle
during Z-phase searching.
2nd spindle default
438 The default spindle speed when power is on. 0 0 - 60000 P
speed
12-25
Para-
Default Setting
value range
No.
Bit Function Range
12 0
Spindle function
0: off
1: on
0-1
0: off
1 0-1
1: on (feedback encoder is
required)
Spindle output mode
0: DMCNET (servo spindle)
2-3 0-2
1: reserved
2: EDAC (analog output)
Speed control mode
4 1
1: PUU
Spindle encoder
magnification
5 0-1
0: 1000 times
2nd spindle 1: 4 times
439 0 0 - 0xFFFF P
application setting Analog spindle speed source
7 0: command 0-1
1: encoder
Analog spindle feedback
encoder source
8 0-1
0: spindle
1: motor
Spindle speed reference
9 0: program 0-1
1: Pr398
Spindle Max. speed
command check
11 0-1
0: off
1: on
Spindle speed D1380 display
mode
12 0-1
0: S-code
1: feedback
2nd spindle encoder
441 Sets the feedback channel of spindle encoder. 8 0-8 P
port No.
2nd spindle encoder Sets the encoder resolution (single-phase).
442 1280 2 - 60000 P
resolution Unit: pulse/rev
Sets the speed integral gain. The greater the
2nd spindle integral value, the faster the response. But if the gain
443 50 1 - 1000 P
gain is too large, it may cause machine jitter.
Unit: 0.001 rad/s
Sets the maximum speed for spindle
positioning. If the current speed exceeds the
setting of Pr444, the system decreases the
spindle speed to match the setting of Pr444
2nd spindle high
444 and then performs spindle positioning. 100 1 - 20000 P
positioning speed
In addition, if the spindle speed is lower than
the setting of Pr444, it refers to Pr460 Spindle
low positioning speed.
Unit: rpm
2nd spindle Sets the Z-phase offset for spindle positioning.
445 0 0 - 36000 R
positioning offset Unit: 0.01 degree
12-26
Para-
Default Setting
mater Item Description Note
value range
No.
Sets the allowable tolerance between the
12
2nd spindle target
446 target speed and actual speed of the spindle. 10 0 - 300 P
speed tolerance
Unit: rpm
Sets the spindle positioning tolerance. If the
actual positioning error exceeds the setting,
the spindle positioning fails.
2nd spindle Positionoing error M2258
447 100 0 - 36000 P
positioning tolerance > Pr447 0
< Pr447 1
Unit: 0.01 degree
If the spindle speed is within the tolerance
2nd spindle zero
448 range, the zero speed signal is on. 5 0 - 1000 P
speed tolerance
(NC > MLC M2257)
2nd spindle
449 Sets the maximum speed for spindle. Unit: rpm 20000 0 - 600000 P
maximum speed
2nd spindle minimum
450 Sets the minimum speed for spindle. Unit: rpm 10 0 - 10000 P
speed
2nd spindle
the spindle. The greater the value, the longer
451 ACC/DEC time 20 1 - 20000 R
the acceleration and deceleration time.
constant
Unit: msec
2nd spindle S-curve Sets the S-curve time constant of the spindle.
452 10 1 - 2000 R
time constant Unit: msec
control, switch M1127 to instantly change the
spindle Kpp gain.
M1127 Spindle Kpp gain
0 Pr459
2nd spindle 2nd Kpp 1 Pr453
453 0 1 - 1000 R
gain
Low-speed positioning of the spindle requires
higher gain value while high-speed positioning
with high gain value may lead to vibration. Use
D1380 Spindle actual speed and this
parameter to instantly change the spindle Kpp
gain value.
2nd spindle tapping Sets the acceleration and deceleration time of
456 ACC/DEC time the spindle when it performs tapping. 2000 1 - 20000 R
constant Unit: msec
2nd spindle tapping
Sets the S-curve time constant of the spindle
457 S-curve time 100 1 - 2000 R
when it performs tapping. Unit: msec
constant
The greater the gain, the less the following
2nd spindle error. However, if the value is set too high, it
458 0 0 - 200 R
feedforward gain may make the control command less smooth
and cause machinery vibration.
control, use this parameter to adjust the
spindle position loop bandwidth. The greater
the gain, the more precise the positioning.
459 2nd spindle Kpp gain However, if the value is set too high, it may 0 0 - 1000 R
cause vibration. The parameter value is
relevant to the bandwidth of the inverter. It is
recommended that you start from a lower gain
and then gradually increase the value.
12-27
Para-
Default Setting
meter Item Description N
value range
No.
If the current spindle speed is slower than the
12
2nd spindle low setting of Pr404 or is zero, when the system
460 100 1 - 20000 P
positioning speed performs spindle positioning, it refers to the
speed set by this parameter. Unit: rpm
Tapping retraction setting. The tapping
2nd spindle tapping
461 retraction speed is F multiply by the value of 10 10 - 50 R
retraction speed ratio
Pr421. Unit: 0.1 times
2nd spindle gear Sets the numerator of the first set of the 2nd
462 1 0 - 60000 P
ratio numerator 1 spindle gear ratio.
2nd spindle gear Sets the denominator of the first set of the 2nd
463 1 0 - 60000 P
ratio denominator 1 spindle gear ratio.
2nd spindle gear Sets the numerator of the second set of the 2nd
464 1 0 - 60000 P
2nd spindle gear Sets the denominator of the second set of the
465 1 0 - 60000 P
ratio denominator 2 2nd spindle gear ratio.
2nd spindle gear Sets the numerator of the third set of the 2nd
466 1 0 - 60000 P
2nd spindle gear Sets the denominator of the third set of the 2nd
467 1 0 - 60000 P
ratio denominator 3 spindle gear ratio.
2nd spindle gear Sets the numerator of the fourth set of the 2nd
468 1 0 - 60000 P
2nd spindle gear Sets the denominator of the fourth set of the
469 1 0 - 60000 P
ratio denominator 4 2nd spindle gear ratio.
12-28
12.5 Machine parameter (MACHINE)

You can set equipment-related parameters, such as software / hardware limit, lead screw pitch,
12
or encoder pulse number, in the machine parameter setting screen. The operation steps are as
follows.
(2) Press MACHINE to enter the machine parameter setting screen.
Figure 12.5.1
12-29
12.5.1 Machine parameter descriptions
Para-
Default Setting
12
value range
No.
Sets the machine coordinates for the 1st
software positive limit.
Set Pr602 to 0 to disable this function.
Unit: mm
1st software positive 1. Overtravel will cause software positive limit -10^5 to
602 error. 10^5 R
limit +10^5
2. Software limit can be canceled by triggering
the special M relay.
Axis Special relays for canceling software limit
X-W M1248 - M1256
Sets the machine coordinates for the 1st
software negative limit.
Set Pr603 to 0 to disable this function.
1st software negative Unit: mm -10^5 to
603 -10^5 R
limit 1. Overtravel will cause software negative limit +10^5
error.
2. Software limit can be canceled by triggering
the special M relay.
Sets the machine coordinates for the 2nd
software positive limit.
2nd software positive -10^5 to
604 Set Pr604 to 0 to disable this function. 10^5 R
limit +10^5
Overtravel will cause software positive limit
error. Unit: mm
software negative limit.
2nd software -10^5 to
605 Set Pr605 to 0 to disable this function. -10^5 R
negative limit +10^5
Overtravel will cause software negative limit
error. Unit: mm
Set Pr634 [Bit 9] to 1 to enable the function of
decimal places of lead screw pitch. After the
Decimals of lead
627 function is enabled, the lead screw pitch for the 0 0 - 9999 P
screw pitch
axis is: Pr633 + Pr627 x 0.0001 (mm).
Unit: 0.1 μm
Sets the input polarity of positive / negative
hardware limits and the home sensor.
Sets to 1 as an NO switch.
Sets to 0 as an NC switch.
628 Sensor setting Bit Function Range 0 0 - 3F P
0 Positive limit sensor setting 0-1
1 Negative limit sensor setting 0-1
2 Home sensor setting 0-1
Sets the motor resolution per revolution

630 Encoder resolution 1280 10 - 50000 P
(single-phase).
Sets the gear number of the counter shaft.
631 Shaft gear number 1 1 - 65535 P
632 Motor gear number Sets the gear number for the motor. 1 1 - 65535 P
12-30
Para-
Default Setting
value range
No.
Sets the corresponding lead screw pitch for the
12
axis. This parameter is only effective for linear
633 Lead screw pitch 10 2 - 100 P
axes (i.e., ineffective for rotation axes).
Unit: mm
Bit Function Range
Scale up
0 0: off 0-1
1: on
Rotation axis feed mode
(available for A, B, and C axes
but not for X, Y, and Z axes.)
0: the rotation axis rotates to
the specified position
(degree) through a non-
shortest path.
1: the rotation axis rotates to
1-3 0-5
the specified position
(degree) through the
shortest path.
2: shows the position (degree)
of the rotation axis in linear
representation.
5: sets the rotation axis as a
linear axis.
Encoder magnification
5 0: 1000 times 0-1
1: 4 times
Axial control Rotation axis unit (available for
634 Pr618, Pr619, Pr620, Pr621, 5 0 - 65535 P
variables
7 and Pr625) 0-1
0: rpm
1: deg/min
Decimal places of lead screw
pitch
9 0-1
0: off
1: on
MPG reverse motion
0: moves the machine
coordinates towards the
positive direction when you
operate the MPG in positive
10 direction. 0-1
1: moves the machine
coordinates towards the
positive direction when you
operate the MPG in reverse
direction.
Rotation axis reverse motion
(lathe)
0: rotates to the specified angle
15 0-1
in the original direction.
1: rotates to the specified angle
in the reverse direction.
12-31
12.6 Homing parameter (HOME)

Homing parameters are for setting the origin search mode and the machine coordinates for the
12
machine origin, and the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th reference points. The operation steps are as follows.
(2) Press HOME to enter the homing parameter setting screen.
Figure 12.6.1
12-32
12.6.1 Homing parameter descriptions
Para-
Default Setting
12
value range
No.
After performing homing and finding the Z
Machine origin pulse, the system has the axis offset by the -10^5 to
606 0 R
coordinate value of Pr606 and refers to the offset position +10^5
as the machine origin. Unit: CU
2nd reference -10^5 to
607 reference point. (Sets the 2nd reference point in 0 P
coordinate +10^5
the G30 command.) Unit: CU
Sets the machine coordinates for the 3rd
3rd reference -10^5 to
608 reference point. (Sets the 3rd reference point in 0 P
coordinate +10^5
Sets the machine coordinates for the 4th
4th reference -10^5 to
609 reference point. (Sets the 4th reference point in 0 P
coordinate +10^5
Sets the position tolerance for the 2nd
reference point. For example, when Pr610 =
Reference position 0.2, it means when the position error between -10^8 to
610 0 P
tolerance the machine coordinate and the 2nd reference +10^8
point is within ±0.2 mm, the axis is regarded as
reaching the 2nd reference point.
0: off
1: mode 1
When homing, once the motor reaches the
home sensor, it reverses and the system
regards the first Z pulse as the origin.
Speed 1
Start
Finish Speed 2
Z pulse
Home sensor
2: mode 2
When homing, after the motor reaches the
home sensor, it carries on in the same
616 Origin search mode direction to leave the home sensor, and the 1 0 - 24 P
system regards the first Z pulse as the origin.
Speed 2
Speed 1
Start Finish
Z pulse
Home sensor
3: mode 3
The motor looks for the Z pulse at the 2nd
homing speed (Pr619) and the system regards
it as the origin.
Start Speed 2
Home
Z pulse
12-33
Para-
Default Setting
value range
No.
4: mode 4 (OT mode)
12
When homing, the system regards the positive
limit as the home sensor. When the positive
limit is triggered, the motor reverses and the
system regards the first Z pulse as the origin.
Start Speed 1
Finish Speed 2
Z pulse
+ Limit sensor
5: mode 5
Absolute motor.
6: mode 6
When homing, once the home sensor is
triggered, the motor reverses and decelerates
to a stop, and the system regards the stop
point as the origin.
Speed 1
Start Finish
Home sensor
7: mode 7 (the function is exclusive to
Renishaw’s BiSS C type single-turn absolute
motors)
616 Origin search mode After the servo performs homing for the 1 0 - 24 P
absolute motor, if the system triggers the
special M relays for homing (M1236 - M1241),
the system regards the current position as the
origin without clearing the machine coordinate.
8: mode 8
There are two possible conditions when
homing. One is that the motor first reaches the
home sensor and the other is that the motor
first reaches the limit sensor.
Condition 1: the motor first reaches the home
sensor and reverses to to find the Z pulse.
Start Speed 1
Finish Speed 2
Z pulse
Home sensor
Condition 2: the motor first reaches the limit
sensor and reverses to find the home sensor,
and then carries on in the same direction to
find the Z pulse.
Start Speed 1
Finish Speed 2 Speed 1
Z pulse
Home sensor
Limit sensor
12-34
Para-
Default Setting
value range
No.
24: mode 24
12
When there is a home sensor on the
mechanism and an absolute motor is used, it is
recommended to use this mode to perform
homing.
The motor first finds the origin in the way as
mode 4 does and the system uses the
absolute reset function in the DGN screen.
After absolute reset, cycle power to the
616 Origin search mode system. The homing mode is automatically 1 0 - 24 P
switched to mode 5 after power cycling.
Start Speed 1
Finish Speed 2
Z pulse
Home sensor
Bit Function Range

Homing search direction
0 0: negative 0-1
1: positive
Search home sensor when
homing
1 0-1
0: off
1: on
Homing mode of rotation axis
2 0: single-turn 0-1
1: absolute
Return mode after reaching
home sensor
0: return to the machine origin
After finding the Z pulse, the
axis offsets by the value set in
Pr606. Then, the system
regards the current position as
617 Origin search setting 3 0-1 1 0 - 31 P
the machine origin, completing
the homing procedure.
1: return to the Z pulse
After finding the Z pulse, the
servo no longer moves,
completing the homing
procedure.
Homing option for sync. motion:
0: when the synchronous
control function is enabled,
the slave axes and the
master axis return to the
origin synchronously.
4 1: when the synchronous 0-1
control function is enabled,
each axis can return to the
origin individually with the
synchronous protection
function (Pr642) remains
enabled.
Sets the speed for searching home sensor
618 1st homing speed (Home Dog protector). 2000 0 - 10000 R
Unit: mm/min
Sets the speed for searching the Z pulse.
619 2nd homing speed 200 0 - 2000 R
Unit: mm/min
12-35
Para-
Default Setting
value range
No.
Sets the speed for the first homing after
12
system starting with Pr618 and Pr619. After the
Speed for moving to
620 first homing, the servo refers to the set value of 10 0 - 20000 R
reference point
Pr620 for the following homing procedures.
Unit: mm/min
During homing, when the home sensor is
triggered (On), the motor reverses until the
signal is off. If the moving distance exceeds the
Homing origin
624 setting of this parameter but the home sensor 20 1 - 2000 R
protection distance
signal remains on, B636 Home sensor error
occurs.
Unit: mm
12-36
12.7 Ethernet setting (ETH.)

You can use Ethernet to connect the system to the PC to enable remote communication. Using
12
the CNCNetwork software and the network setting of NC series controller can manage the
online files of multiple NC controllers with one PC, enabling data sharing and file management
with the PC, and transmission-along-with-machining (DNC).
(3) Press ETH. to enter the Ethernet setting page.
Figure 12.7.1
12-37
12.7.1 Ethernet parameter descriptions
Para-
Default Setting
12
value range
No.
10030 Host name System’s host name. CNC000 1-8 R
10031 IP address Sets the system IP address. 0.0.0.0 0 - 255 P
10032 Subnet mask Sets the subnet mask of the system. 0.0.0.0 0 - 255 P
10033 Default gateway Sets the system default gateway. 0.0.0.0 0 - 255 P
Sets the network function of the system.
10034 Network function 0: off 0 0-1 P
1: on
Enable the DHCP function.
10035 DHCP switch 0: off 0 0-1 P
1: on
Remote PC
10036 IP address 1 0 255 P
IP address 1
Remote PC
10037 IP address 2 0 255 P
IP address 2
Remote PC
10038 IP address 3 0 255 P
IP address 3
Remote PC
10039 IP address 4 0 255 P
IP address 4
Remote PC
10040 IP address 5 0 255 P
IP address 5
Specifies an IP address from Pr10036 -
Pr10040 for the NETWORK folder under [File
Shared remote manage].
10041 0 0-5 P
directory IP address 0: do not specify an IP address
1 - 5: specifies the corresponding IP address
in Pr10036 - Pr10040
Bit Function Range
0 FTP function switch 0-1
10055 FTP setting 1 FTP anonymous login 0-1 0 0 - 11 P

3 Switch to main file after file upload 0-1
0: off; 1: on
10057 FTP username Sets the username with 1 - 6 characters. CNCFTP - P
10058 FTP password Sets the password with 1 - 6 characters. 123456 - P
12-38
12.8 Compensation parameter (COMP)

During the operation of machine tool, differences in mechanism may lead to motion error, and
12
thus affect the machining result.
Set the relevant compensation parameters to have the controller compute the appropriate
compensation amount according to the machine characteristics. The operation steps are as
follows.
(3) Press COMP to enter the compensation parameter setting screen.
Figure 12.8.1

(6) When entering values in the length compensation fields, press um to enter absolute values
or press um+ to enter incremental values.
(7) Use the CNCSoft to convert the compensation data measured by the calibration equipment
into compensation parameter files. Then, press IMPORT on the function bar in the next
page to import the data in absolute format. You can also press IMPORT+ to import the data
and add the data to the existing values.
(8) Press OK to confirm the update.
12-39
12.8.1 Compensation parameter descriptions
Para-
Default Setting
12
value range
No.
There is backlash in the lead pitch for most of
the mechanical systems. Set this parameter
with a positive value to compensate for
backlash in positive direction, and vice versa.
Set this parameter to 0 to disable the backlash
compensation function. Unit: mm, inch
Backlash
1000 compensation 0 -2 to +2 R
amount
(1) Backlash in Y axis

Sets the time constant of backlash
compensation. When the backlash
Backlash
1001 compensation time is 0, the backlash 0 0 - 10000 R
compensation time
compensation function is disabled.
Unit: 0.1 msec
Backlash Sets the delay time for enabling the backlash
1002 compensation compensation function. 0 0 - 10000 R
delay time Unit: 0.1 msec
Sets the friction compensation amount.
Unit: mm
Friction
1003 compensation 0 0-1 R
amount
(Pr1006 [Bit 4] = 0) (Pr1006 [Bit 4] = 1)

Sets the friction compensation time.
Unit: 0.1 msec
Friction
1004 0 0 - 10000 R
compensation time
(Pr1006 [Bit 4] = 0) (Pr1006 [Bit 4] = 1)
12-40
Para-
Default Setting
value range
No.
Sets the friction compensation delay time.
12
Unit: 0.1 msec
Friction
1005 compensation delay 0 0 - 10000 R
time
(Pr1006 [Bit 4] = 0) (Pr1006 [Bit 4] = 1)

Bit Function Range
Absolute or incremental input.
0: absolute input (actual value of
the measuring point)
0 0-1
1: incremental input (the difference
of the current and previous
measuring points)
Friction compensation in positive
direction.
Timing: compensates when the
2 machine moves in positive direction 0-1
0: off
1: on
Friction compensation in negative
direction.
Timing: compensates when the
3 machine moves in reverse direction 0-1
0: off
1: on
Friction compensation mode
0: pulse width type
Thread pitch
1006 0 0 - 0xFFFF R
compensation setting
4 0-1
1: exponential type
Measuring direction (of the start
point)
0: positive direction from machine
15 0-1
coordinates
1: negative direction from machine
coordinates
Bi-directional thread pitch
compensation
1 0-1
0: off
1: on
12-41
Para-
Default Setting
value range
No.
Sets the number of the measuring points for
12
Measuring point the lead screw pitch compensation with the
1007 0 0 - 128 R
number maximum as 128. Set this parameter to 0 to
disable the compensation function.
Sets the interval between each measuring point
1008 Measuring interval on the lead screw. 0 0 - 300 R
Unit: mm
Sets the offset between the measuring point
and machine origin. For example, when you set
this parameter to 0, there will be no offset from
-1000 to
1009 Measuring offset the origin; when you set this parameter to 10, 0 R
+1000
there will be an offset of 10 mm from the origin.
Note: the direction of the offset should be identical to
the direction specified in Pr1006 [Bit 15].
Sets the lead screw pitch compensation for the
1010 - 1st to 128th points. The 1st point and the origin
Data 1 - Data 128 0 -20 to +20 R
1137 should be the same point.
Unit: mm (linear axes), deg (rotation axes)
Sets the lead screw pitch compensation in
negative direction for the 1st to 128th points.
1138 - Reverse data 1 - Enable Pr1006 Bi-directional thread pitch
0 -20 to +20 R
1265 Reverse data 128 compensation to have this parameter group
take effect.
Unit: mm (linear axes), deg (rotation axes)
12-42
12.9 System parameter (SYSTEM)

In the system parameter setting screen, you can change the settings of the system’s working
12
environment, such as system date, system time, background color, function bar text color, and
label text color. You can set each of these items individually as required. The operation steps
are as follows.
(3) Press SYSTEM to enter the system parameter setting screen.
(4) Press and to move the cursor to the specified field, and enter appropriate values
according to the range or format specified in the lower right corner of the screen as shown
in Figure 12.9.1.
Figure 12.9.1

(6) To set parameters for color-related itemss, press COLOR, and a color selection box
appears for your reference.
(7) To reset the settings, press DEFAULT, and a dialog box for confirmation appears.
(8) Enter “Y” and then press ENTER to reset.
12-43
12.9.1 System parameter descriptions
Para- Default Setting

12
value range
No.
10000 System date Sets the system date (format: yyyy/mm/dd). - - -
10001 System time Sets the system time (format: hh:mm:ss). - - -
Sets the system language.
0: English
10002 System language 1 0-2 -
1: Traditional Chinese
2: Simplified Chinese
10003 Screen brightness Sets the screen brightness. 50 1 - 99 -
Set this parameter to change the language of
User-defined the software screens. The setting range
10004 0 0 - 10 -
language varies according to the number of languages
set by the user.
Bit Function Range
0 Mouse sensitivity 0 - 100
External device HID mouse format 256 -
10005 256 R
setting 15 0: off 0-1 36708
1: on
- Cursor display time (second) 1 - 15
Execute the macro program specified by this
Initial macro parameter before pressing CYCLE START. 9000 -
10007 Note: this program has to be stored in the 0 P
program 9999
O_MACRO folder and the naming method is
O+Pr10007.
Sets the unit system for length display on the
NC system.
10008 System length unit 0 0-1 P
0: metric
1: imperial
Sets the display of the synchronous
coordinates.
Bit Function Range
Sync coordinate display
Sync coordinate 0 0: off 0-1
10009 0 0 - 65535 -
setting 1: on
Sync workpiece coordinate
display
2 0-1
0: off
1: on
Enable the screensaver.
10010 Screensaver 0: off 0 0-1 -
1: on
Screensaver time
10011 Sets the first wait time for the screensaver. 10 1 - 60 -
1
Screen brightness Sets the first level of brightness for the
10012 30 0 - 99 -
1 screensaver.
Screensaver time Sets the second wait time for the
10013 30 1 - 60 -
2 screensaver.
Screen brightness Sets the second level of brightness for the
10014 10 0 - 99 -
2 screensaver.
12-44

value range
No.
Bit Function Range
12
Account permission
activation method
0: by system
1 0-1
1: by external I/O
M2934 = 1 (lock)
M2934 = 0 (unlock)
Auto open the previous file:
after enabling this function,
when you insert the USB
drive or CF card to the
2 controller, the system 0-1
automatically opens the last
executed file.
0: off
10015 Account setting 1: on 0 0 - 65535 P
Auxiliary input window
(This function should be
used with the mouse. With
the mouse connected to the
system, when you click the
3 upper right corner, a list 0-1
appears; when you click the
input window, a keyboard
appears.)
0: off
1: on
Machining count display
format
6 0-1
0: Word
1: Double word
Bit Function Range
Reset system after EMG
release (Reset): sets whether
to automatically generate a
0 Reset signal after the 0-1
emergency stop is released.
0: off
1: on
[SOFT] display after bootup:
sets whether to display the
SOFT screen as the default
1 screen after system bootup. 0-1
0: off
1: switch to SOFT screen
after bootup
10016 System setting Display alarm screen when 4 0 - 65535 P
alarm occurs
2 0-1
0: no alarm display
1: display the alarm
System parameter auto
backup: when this function is
enabled, the system
automatically makes a
backup of the parameter
data and stores it to the CF
3 card. Once any of the 0-1
parameters is modified, the
backup data in the CF card
is updated as well.
0: off
1: on
12-45

value range
No.
Bit Function Range
12
Hidden axis display: if you
set not to display an axis in
the CONFIG screen, set this
parameter to display or hide
the coordinate of the
4 corresponding axis. 0-1
0: hide the axis coordinate in
the CONFIG screen.
1: display the axis coordinate
in the CONFIG screen.
O macro file protection:
once this function is enabled,
you can only copy the O
macro files to the internal
5 memory rather than copy the 0-1
files from the internal memory
to external devices.
0: off
1: on
[POS] screen display
8 0: on 0-1
1: off
10016 System setting [PRG] screen display 4 0 - 65535 P
9 0: on 0-1
1: off
[OFS] screen display
10 0: on 0-1
1: off
[DGN] screen display
11 0: on 0-1
1: off
[ALM] screen display
12 0: on 0-1
1: off
[GRA] screen display
13 0: on 0-1
1: off
[PAR] screen display
14 0: on 0-1
1: off
[SOFT] screen display
15 0: on 0-1
1: off
Bit Function Range
G-code editing: sets whether
to allow G-code editing.
0 0-1
0: off
10017 G-code edit setting 1: on
1 0 - 65535 -
Macro call file source
1 0: CF card 0-1
1: internal memory
12-46

value range
No.
Bit Function Range
12
SF speed setting: sets
whether you can use the SF
SET function to set the
3 cutting feedrate. 0-1
0: off
1: on
Program auto reset after
editing (Reset): sets whether
the cursor will automatically
4 return to the program 0-1
starting line after file editing.
10017 G-code edit setting 0: off 1 0 - 65535 -
1: on
Subprogram call file source
5 0: CF card 0-1
1: internal memory
Subprogram file name
display
6 0-1
0: on
1: off
.txt file support
7 0: off 0-1
1: on
10018 Background color Sets the background color. LIGHTGRAY 0 - 65535 -
10019 Title bar text color Sets the text color for the title bar. BLACK 0 - 65535 -
10020 Mode bar text color Sets the text color for the mode bar. DARKBLUE 0 - 65535 -
Function bar text
10021 Sets the text color for the function bar. BLACK 0 - 65535 -
color
10022 Label text color Sets the text color for the labels. BLACK 0 - 65535 -
Numeric value
10023 Sets the text color for numeric values. BLUE 0 - 65535 -
color
10024 Table gridline color Sets the color of table gridline. BLACK 0 - 65535 -
System cursor
10025 Sets the color of the cursor. COLOR_S07 0 - 65535 -
color
System text
10026 Sets the text highlight color. WHITE 0 - 65535 -
highlight color
Software panel
10027 Sets the cursor color in the software panel. YELLOW 0 - 65535 -
cursor color
10028 System alarm color Sets the color of system alarms. RED 0 - 65535 -
User-defined alarm
10029 Sets the color of user-defined alarms. BLUE 0 - 65535 -
color
Software panel text Sets the text highlight color in the software
10042 COLOR_S07 0 - 65535 -
highlight color panel.
12-47

value range
No.
Bit Function Range
12
[OPERATE] display
0 0-1
0: on; 1: off
[MAGA] display
1 0-1
0: on; 1: off
[SPINDLE] display
2 0-1
0: on; 1: off
[MACHINE] display
3 0-1
0: on; 1: off
[HOME] display
4 0-1
0: on; 1: off
[COMP] display
[PAR] group item 5 0-1
10043 0: on; 1: off 0 0 - 65535 P
display
[SYSTEM] display
6 0-1
0: on; 1: off
[MLC] display
7 0-1
0: on; 1: off
[GRAPHIC] display
8 0-1
0: on; 1: off
[SERVO] display
9 0-1
0: on; 1: off
[CONFIG] display
10 0-1
0: on; 1: off
[SET RIO] display
11 0-1
0: on; 1: off
Enable the Teach function for the
corresponding axis. In JOG or MPG mode,
set this parameter to enable the Teach
function of the PRG group.
Bit Function Range
X axis teaching
0 0-1
0: off; 1: on
Y axis teaching
1 0-1
0: off; 1: on
Z axis teaching
2 0-1
0: off; 1: on
A axis teaching
Channel 0 - teach 3 0-1
10044 0: off; 1: on 0 0 - 65535 P
setting
B axis teaching
4 0-1
0: off; 1: on
C axis teaching
5 0-1
0: off; 1: on
U axis teaching
6 0-1
0: off; 1: on
V axis teaching
7 0-1
0: off; 1: on
W axis teaching
8 0-1
0: off; 1: on
Teaching G-code format
15 0-1
0: moving axes; 1: all axes
12-48

value range
No.
Bit Function Range
12
[TUNING] display
0 0-1
0: on; 1: off
[TEXT WR] display
1 0-1
[PRG[/[OFS]/ 0: on; 1: off
10045 [DGN] group item [LOGO WR] display 0 0 - 65535 P
2 0-1
display 0: on; 1: off
[MACRO] display
8 0-1
0: on; 1: off
[FILE QUEUE] display
15 0-1
0: on; 1: off
Bit Function Range
Barcode file reading
0-1 0-2
0: off; 1: file scan; 2: element
10053 Barcode setting Trigger special M relay after 0- 0 0 - 8190 P

2
reading barcode 1023
Barcode reading file source
12 0: CF card 0-1
1: internal memory
10054 Auto logout time Sets the auto logout duration. Unit: min 0 0 - 1440 -
Bit Function Range
Tool length
0 0: Auxiliary; 1: Absolute; 0-2
2: Incremental
10059 OFS input mode Tool wear 0 0 - 42 -

2: Incremental
Coordinates
2: Incremetal
Maximum tool
Sets the maximum tool wear for a single cut
10060 wear for a single 0 0 - 65535 -
to avoid machining size error. Unit: 0.001 mm
cut
Sets the maximum read length.
10061 Barcode setting 0: 64 characters (maximum) 0 0 - 63 P
1 - 63: 1 character - 63 characters
12-49
12.10 MLC setting (MLC)

You can set parameters related to the MLC ladder, such as the displayed device and ladder
12
color, in the MLC setting screen. The operation steps are as follows.
(3) Press MLC to enter the MLC setting screen.
Figure 12.10.1

(6) To set color-related items, press COLOR, and a color selection dialog box appears for your
reference.
12-50
12.10.1 MLC parameter descriptions

12
value range
No.
2000 MLC scanning time Sets the MLC scanning time. Unit: msec 2 2 - 1000 P
MLC fixed scanning time
2001 Control flag 0: off 0 0-1 P
1: on
2003 Local I/O filter time Sets the filter time for local I/O. Unit: msec 0 0 - 20 P
12000 Program title Sets the program title. - - -
12001 Company name Enter the company name. 0 - -
12002 Designer name Enter the designer name. 0 - -
Sets whether to show the comments.
12003 Show comment 0: off 0 0-1 -
1: on
Sets whether to show the symbols.
12004 Show symbol 0: off 0 0-1 -
1: on
12005 Ladder color Sets the ladder color. BLACK 0 - 65535 -
12006 Ladder text color. Sets the text color for the ladder. BLACK 0 - 65535 -
12007 Ladder symbol color Sets the symbol color for the ladder. BLACK 0 - 65535 -
12008 Ladder cursor color Sets the cursor color for the ladder. LIGHT BLUE 0 - 65535 -
Ladder monitoring Sets the monitoring status display color LIGHT
12009 0 - 65535 -
status display color for the ladder. GREEN
Ladder device Sets the comment color of the device for
12010 BROWN 0 - 65535 -
comment color the ladder.
Ladder segment Sets the comment color of the section for
12011 BROWN 0 - 65535 -
comment color the ladder.
Ladder row comment Sets the comment color of the ladder
12012 BROWN 0 - 65535 -
color row.
Ladder monitoring Sets the color of the monitoring values
12013 LIGHT RED 0 - 65535 -
value color for the ladder.
NC special device
12014 Sets the color of NC special devices. COLOR_S2B 0 - 65535 -
color
MLC special device
12015 Sets the color of MLC special devices. MAGENTA 0 - 65535 -
color
Bit Function Range
MLC edit protection:
when this function is
enabled, you can only
0 edit the MLC programs 0-1
in EDIT mode.
0: off
1: on
MLC display
12016 MLC protection 1 0: on 0-1 1 0 - 65535 P
1: off
MLC auto backup:
enabled, the system
automatically makes a
2 backup of the MLC 0-1
data to the CF card.
0: off
1: on
12-51

value range
No.
Bit Function Range
12
EMG protection for
MLC file saving
3 0-1
0: on
1: off
12016 MLC protection 1 0 - 65535 P
MLC file-saving
reminder for group
4 switch 0-1
0: off
1: on
Bit Function Range
Immediate take effect
after MLC file load:
enabled, MLC files take
0 effect right after being 0-1
loaded without restarting
the system.
0: off
1: on
Record system data in
special registers
0: off
1: on
D1102:
Write main file name
(O0000 - O9999)
D1103, D1104:
Total machining time
(sec.)
D1105, D1106:
Single machining time
(sec.)
D1107: year, month
D1108: date, hour
D1109: minute, second
12017 MLC setting Note: set hexadecimal 0 0 - 65535 P
1 format to access D
0-1
registers and then
convert the data into
decimal format for use.
Example:
February 28th, 2020
PM06:45:59
D1107 = 14 02
14 (HEX) = 20 (DEC)
(Year = 2000 + 20)
02 (HEX) = 02 (DEC)
D1108 = 1C 12
1C (HEX) = 28 (DEC)
12 (HEX) = 18 (DEC)
D1109 = 2D 3B
2D (HEX) = 45 (DEC)
3B (HEX) = 59 (DEC)
Shortcuts for triggering
M device
2 0-1
0: off
1: on
MLC user-defined
keypad
3 0-1
0: off
1: on
12-52

value range
No.
Bit Function Range
12
0 Enable A0 - A15 alarms 0-1
12027 Enable user alarm 0 7 Enable A112 - A127 alarms 0-1 0 0 - 65535 P
Bit Function Range

12028 Enable user alarm 1 7 Enable A368 - A383 alarms 0-1 0 0 - 65535 P
12-53
12.11 Graph parameter (GRAPHIC)

You can set the graphic display of the motion trajectory in the GRA group with graph
12
parameters. The operation steps are as follows.
(3) Press GRAPHIC to enter the graph parameter setting screen.
Figure 12.11.1

(6) To set color-related items, press COLOR, and a color selection dialog box appears for your
reference.
12-54
12.11.1 Graph parameter descriptions
Para-
Default Setting
12
value range
No.
14000 Line color Sets the line color. 0 0 - 65535 -
14001 Background color Sets the background color. 1183 0 - 65535 -

Sets the graphic display.
Graphic display
14002 Bit Function Range 1 0 - 65535 -
setting
0-3 Line width 0-4
Bit Function Range
14003 Graphic setting 0 0 - 65535 P
0 Graphic default screen 0-1
Sets the graphic dimension of the X-Z plane.
14006 Graphic dimension 200 5 - 100000 -
Unit: mm
Bit Function Range
Reserve graphics after M30:
when this function is enabled,
14008 Graphic setting the graphics are automatically 0 0 - 65535 P
1 reserved after M30 is executed. 0-1
0: off
1: on
14010 Grid color Sets the grid color. 46516 0 - 65535 -
14011 Subgrid color Sets the subgrid color. 46516 0 - 65535 -
Coordinate axis
14012 Sets the color of the coordinate axis. 65504 0 - 65535 -
color
14013 Auxiliary line color Sets the color of the auxiliary lines. 2016 0 - 65535 -
12-55
12.12 Servo parameter (SERVO)

You can set the parameters for the servo drive in the servo parameter setting screen. The
12
(3) Press SERVO to enter the servo parameter setting screen.
Figure 12.12.1
12-56
12.12.1 Servo parameter descriptions
Default Setting
Group No. Function Description Note
value range
P0
P1
0
1
Firmware
version
mode and
Displays the firmware version of the servo.
Input for control Sets the control mode.

Bit Function Range 0
- 0
0x00 -
0x110F
-
-
12
control
8 Torque output direction 0-1 (HEX)
command
Position The low-pass filter for position command is
Appli-
command usually used for eliminating undesired high-
P1 8 0 0 cable to
smoothing frequency response or noise and smoothing
CNC
constant and commands. Unit: 10 msec
The low-pass filter for S-curve is usually used
S-curve Appli-
for eliminating undesired high-frequency
P1 36 ACC/DEC 0 0 cable to
response or noise and smoothing and
constant CNC
commands. Unit: msec
Load inertia
P1 37 Load inertia ratio of servo motor. Unit: 0.1 times 10 0 - 2000 -
ratio
E-gear ratio E-gear ratio numerator. Do not change the 1 to Read
P1 44 1
numerator (N1) setting in the Servo On state. Unit: pulse (229-1) only
E-gear ratio
E-gear ratio denominator. Do not change the 1 to Read
P1 45 denominator 1
setting in the Servo On state. Unit: pulse (231-1) only
(M1)
Maximum speed Sets the maximum speed of the servo motor.
P1 55 0 0 - 65535 -
limit The default is the rated speed. Unit: rpm
Percentage of
Sets the percentage of friction compensation.
P1 62 friction 0 0 - 100 -
Unit: %
compensation
Constant of
Appli-
friction Sets the smoothing constant of friction
P1 63 4 4 cable to
compensation compensation. Unit: ms
CNC
(ms)
Position The moving filter smooths the beginning and
P1 68 command - end of the step command, but it also delays 4 0 - 100 -
moving filter the command. Unit: ms
Increasing the position control gain can
enhance the position response and reduce
Position control
P2 0 the deviation in position control. If you set the 35 0 - 2047 -
gain
value too high, it may cause vibration and
noise. Unit: rad/s
Adjusts the rate of change for the position
control gain according to the gain switching
Position control
condition. This parameter is usually used for
P2 1 gain rate of 100 10 - 500 -
adjusting the gain of the feeding axis for it to
change
be in accordance with that of the spindle
when tapping. Unit: %
If the position control command changes
position smoothly, increasing the gain value
Position feed can reduce the position following errors. If it
P2 2 50 0 - 100 -
forward gain does not change smoothly, decreasing the
gain value can reduce the mechanical
vibration during operation. Unit: %
If the position control command changes
position smoothly, decreasing the smoothing
Position feed
constant value can reduce the position
forward gain
P2 3 following errors. If it does not change 5 2 - 100 -
smoothing
smoothly, increasing the smoothing constant
constant
value can reduce the mechanical vibration
during operation. Unit: msec
12-57
Default Setting
value range
Increasing the speed control gain can
Speed control enhance the speed response. If you set the
12
P2 4 500 0 - 8191 -
gain value too high, it may cause vibration and
noise. Unit: rad/s
Speed control Adjust the rate of change for the speed
P2 5 gain rate of control gain according to the gain switching 100 10 - 500 -
change condition. Unit: %
Increasing the value of the integral speed
control can enhance the speed response and
Speed integral
P2 6 reduce the deviation in speed control. If you 100 0 - 1023 -
compensation
set the value too high, it may cause vibration
and noise. Unit: rad/s
If the speed control command changes speed
smoothly, increasing the gain value can
Speed feed reduce the speed following errors. If it does
P2 7 0 0 - 100 -
forward gain not change smoothly, decreasing the gain
value can reduce the mechanical vibration
during operation. Unit: %
DI response Digital input response filter time.
P2 9 2 0 - 20 -
filter time Unit: 2 msec
Notch filter The first setting for mechanical resonance
P2 23 1000 50 - 1000 -
frequency (1) frequency. Unit: Hz
Notch filter The first Notch filter attenuation level. The
P2 24 attenuation level Notch filter is disabled if this parameter is set 0 0 - 32 -
(1) to 0. Unit: dB
Sets the time constant for the low-pass filter
Resonance
for resonance suppression. The low-pass filter
P2 25 suppression 2 0 - 1000 -
is disabled if this parameter is set to 0.
low-pass filter
Unit: 0.1 msec
Increasing this parameter can increase the
damping of the speed loop. Setting the value
Appli-
Anti-interference of P2-26 to equal P2-06 is recommended. In
P2 26 0 0 cable to
gain Position mode, decrease the value of this
CNC
parameter to reduce position overshoot.
Unit: 0.001
Gain switching
When the signal of gain switching is on, the
condition and 0-4
P2 27 rate of change for the speed control gain is 0 -
method (HEX)
changed to the setting of P2-05.
selection
Gain switching Controls the switching of smoothing gain.
P2 28 10 0 - 1000 -
time constant Unit: 10 msec
Notch filter The second setting for mechanical resonance
P2 43 1000 50 - 2000 -
Notch filter The second Notch filter attenuation level.
P2 44 attenuation level The Notch filter is disabled if this parameter is 0 0 - 32 -
(2) set to 0. Unit: dB
Notch filter The third setting for mechanical resonance
P2 45 1000 50 - 2000 -
Notch filter The third Notch filter attenuation level.
P2 46 attenuation level The Notch filter is disabled if this parameter is 0 0 - 32 -
(3) set to 0. Unit: dB
Auto resonance 0: fixed
P2 47 suppression 1: auto 1 0-2 -
mode 2: continuous
Speed detection
P2 49 filter and jitter Sets the filter for speed estimation. Unit: sec 0 0 - 1F -
suppression
12-58
Default Setting
value range
Increasing the position control integral
Position integral
P2 53 compensation to reduce the position steady- 0 0 - 1023 -
12
compensation
state errors. Unit: rad/s
Sets the operation mode of the motor. Cycle
power to the servo to have the setting take Cycle
Absolute effect. power
P2 69 0 0-1
encoder to the
0: incremental type
servo
1: absolute type
Read
P4 0 Fault record (N) The last abnormal status record. 0 -
only
Fault record Read
P4 1 The second to last abnormal status record. 0 -
(N-1) only
Fault record Read
P4 2 The third to last abnormal status record. 0 -
(N-2) only
Fault record Read
P4 3 The fourth to last abnormal status record. 0 -
(N-3) only
Fault record Read
P4 4 The fifth to last abnormal status record. 0 -
(N-4) only
Firmware Read
P5 0 Displays the firmware subversion of the servo. 0 -
subversion only
12-59
12.13 Channel setting (CONFIG)

You can enable the axes and define their attributes with this function as shown in Figure
12
12.13.1. This function is not available in AUTO and MDI modes.
Figure 12.13.1

(3) Press CONFIG to enter the channel setting screen.
(4) The attribute setting fields of an axis that is not enabled are grayed-out. Select the check
box of Enable for the axis to set its attributes.
(5) NC / MLC axis selection: set the axis as either an NC or MLC axis.
(6) Port number: port number of the axis should be identical to the station number in the servo
system. No. 1 is obligatory while other numbers can be arranged randomly.
(7) After defining all the axes, press OK.
(8) Restart the NC system.
Note:
1. To enable an axis, firstly select the check box of the corresponding Enable field. Then, you can set the
axis as either an NC axis or MLC axis and set its port number which cannot be identical to other port
numbers.
2. To disable an axis, move the cursor to the corresponding Enable field and press ENTER to cancel the
selection. Then, the axis is disabled.
3. When you change the value of the parameter with a P marked in the Parameter Name field, you have
to restart the NC system to have the changed value take effect. When you change the value of the
parameter without a P marked in the Parameter Name field, it takes effect immediately without power
cycling of the system.
12-60
12.14 RIO setting (SET RIO)

The NC system can add the control switches for external devices with the I/O extension
12
modules. You can enable the I/O module in the RIO Setting screen as shown in Figure 12.14.1.
Figure 12.14.1

(3) Press SET RIO to enter the RIO Setting page.
(4) Press and to move the cursor to the corresponding Enable field of the specified RIO
port, and press ENTER to select the check box and enable its corresponding settings.
(5) Press and to move the cursor to the Sensor setting field, press ENTER, and an
input window appears. After entering the value, press ENTER to complete the setting.
(6) Press and to move the cursor to the Disc. field, and press ENTER to select or
cancel the selection.
(7) After enabling and setting all the I/O modules, press OK to complete the setting.
12-61
12.14.1 Details of RIO setting
RIO: press OK after completing the settings.
12
(1) (2) (3) (4)
(1) Displays the status of the RIO ports in sequence according to the station numbers.
(2) Select the check box of the corresponding Enable field and set the RIO type to 0 as AD/DA,
1 as DA, 2 as AD, or 3 as DIO.
(3) DI input of the RIO can be set as the positive limit, negative limit, and home sensor of each
axis, while only the DIs of Station 0 (the first RIO board) can be set. DIs on other RIO
boards cannot be set. You can set 32 points in total from DI0 to DI31.
(4) Select the Disc. Field to have the DO remain its status when it is disconnected from the
controller.
Home Limit: press OK after completing the setting.
(1)
(2)
(1) Axis selection: positive limit, negative limit, and home limit DI of X - A axes are input from
the AXIS 1~4 connector on the controller (this connector is only available on NC3XX series
models). According to the selected axes, each axis takes three DI points from X256, which
are positive limit DI, negative limit DI, and home limit DI respectively.
12-62
For example, if you select Y and Z axes, the positive limit, negative limit, and home limit for
each axis are as shown in the following table.
12
Axis
X axis Y axis Z axis
Signal
Positive limit AXIS_P1 X256 X259
Negative limit AXIS_P2 X257 X260
Home AXIS_P3 X258 X261
The special M relay code corresponding to the DI signal of each axis does not change
regardless of the signal source.
Axis
X axis Y axis Z axis
Signal
Positive limit M2144 M2148 M2152
Negative limit M2145 M2149 M2153
Home M2146 M2150 M2154
(2) Sets the filter level of the DI on the RIO board. The interval between each level is 40 ms and
there are 5 levels in total.
Level 0 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5
200 μs 200 μs 400 μs 600 μs 800 μs 1 ms
12.14.2 Setting DAC module (NC-EIO-DAC04)
The following steps illustrate how to set the DAC (Digital to analog converter) module.
(1) In the RIO Setting screen, enable the 5th port. You can only set the 5th to 8th ports of the
DAC module.
(2) Set the RIO type to 1 and D1464 - D1467 correspond to the output points 0 - 3 on the
module card.
(3) Rotate the station knob of the DAC module to 4.
(4) Connect the DAC module to the controller in the same way as connecting the RIO.
(5) After complete the above four steps, cycle power to the system. Then, set the value 1024 to
D1464, and you can measure 1.25V at the output point 0 on the DAC module (-/+10V
correspond to -8191 to +8192).
Refer to the following table for the RIO port numbers and their corresponding MLC special
register addresses.
DAC / Port No. 5 6 7 8

Output point 0 D1464 D1472 D1480 D1488
12-63
12.15 Search (SEARCH)

Use the Search function to find the specified parameter field by entering the parameter number,
12
which is a faster and easier way to display the specified parameter. The operation steps are as
follows.
(3) Enter the parameter number to be searched to the input field in the lower left corner of the
screen.
(4) Press SEARCH to search for the specified parameter.
Note: in addition to using the Search function, you can also search for the parameter in the PAR screen by
entering “S + parameter number” and pressing ENTER.
12.16 Parameter group (PAR GRP)

Various types of parameters are available in the NC system. Equipment distributors can use the
parameter group function to provide users with the most appropriate combination of parameters
according to industrial requirements for machining, which simplifies the complicated parameter
adjustments.
With this function, you can use G05P_ to switch the parameter groups during machining as
shown in Figure 12.16.1.
Figure 12.16.1

(3) Press PAR GRP to enter the parameter group setting page.
(4) Enter the specified parameter number in the No. field and press ENTER to display the
corresponding parameter name.
12-64
(5) Press SRT PAR to display the parameters by numbers in ascending or descending order.
(6) Press and to move the cursor to the Group field, enter the value, and press
ENTER to complete setting the parameter group. You can also stop the cursor at the
Group field, press RED PAR, and a confirmation window appears. Enter “Y” and press
ENTER to access the current parameter values and write them to the corresponding fields.
(7) To delete a group, press and to move the cursor to any of the fields of the group
12
to be deleted, press DEL GRP, and a confirmation window appears. Enter “Y” and press
ENTER to delete the group.
(8) After enabling multiple groups, press AVERAGE and a confirmation window appears. Enter
“Y” and press ENTER, and the system divides the maximum of the setting parameter by
the number of currently enabled groups and defines the quotient as the first term, assigning
values to each group field in arithmetic progression with the common difference the same
as the first term.
(9) Press SAVE, and a confirmation window appears. Enter “Y” and press ENTER to save the
settings.
(10) After setting the groups, press and to move the cursor to the specified group
field, then press WRT PAR, and a confirmation window appears. Enter “Y” and press
ENTER to write the values to corresponding parameters.
Note:
1. The parameter write function overwrites the original values, so ensure the new values are correct
before using this function.
2. The parameter group function supports up to 20 parameters and 20 groups.
12-65
12.17 Other settings

12.17.1 Setting for absolute motor
12
Follow these steps to set the system when using the NC series controller with an absolute
motor.
(1) In the homing parameter screen, set Pr616 Origin search mode to 5 (either an incremental
or absolute encoder can be used. When you use an absolute motor for the first time, cycle
power to the servo and controller after setting the parameter.)
Refer to the following figure.
12-66
(2) After setting the parameter, to reset the absolute encoder, go to DGN > SYS MON > SRV
MON as shown in the following figure.
12
(3) Set the system to JOG or MPG mode to use the absolute reset function. In JOG or MPG
mode, move the axis to the position to be defined as the origin, enter “1” and press ENTER
to complete the setting. Meanwhile, the Home indicator is on, meaning that this axis has
completed homing.
Note: when a servo alarm occurs, the special M relay for absolute reset (Abs Rst) becomes 0, meaning
that the absolute origin is lost. The following are the relevant alarms for absolute reset.
AL060: absolute position is lost. Perform absolute reset.
AL061: battery undervoltage. Replace the battery.
AL069: wrong encoder. Ensure an absolute encoder is connected.
12-67
12.17.2 Setting synchronous motion control
Application description: the A axis (slave axis) is required to follow the Z axis (master axis) in the
12
same direction. Assume that M13 is to enable the synchronous function and M14 is to disable it,
the settings are as follows.
1. Set Pr350 to 13.
2. Set Pr351 to 14.
3. Set Pr364 Synchronous control A to 3.
When M13 is executed, the MLC triggers M1088 (Trigger for synchronous control) and M1092
(A slave axis follows the master axis) at the same time. When the system commands the Z axis
to move, the A axis moves synchronously. If there is a command to move the A axis when the
synchronous function is enabled, an alarm occurs since the slave axis (A axis) cannot receive a
motion command from the system. Execute M14 to turn off M1088 to stop the synchronization
function. The synchronous control function is effective in AUTO, MDI, JOG, MPG, and HOME
modes.
Important:
(1) Once you set an axis as a master axis, you cannot set it as a slave axis.
(2) Once you set an axis as a slave axis, you cannot set it as a master axis.
(3) Multiple slave axes can follow the same master axis.
(4) Pressing RESET does not disable the synchronous control function.
(5) The synchronous control function is not available during tapping.
Program:
G54X0Y0Z0A0
G90G54G0X10.Y10.Z10.
Z50.
A0
M13
Z0.
Z111.
G4X2.
Z150.
M14
A100.
A51.
M30
12-68
Relevant parameters:
Para-
Default
meter Item Description Setting range Note
value
12
No.
Halt M-code 1
0: disabled
Halt M-code 2
Halt M-code 3
Halt M-code Halt M-code 4
350 - 357 0 0 - 1000 P
1-8
Halt M-code 5
Halt M-code 6
Halt M-code 7
Halt M-code 8
Sets the synchronization direction.
Bit 0 - 5: synchronous control of X - C axes
0: same direction
Bit Function Range
0 Synchronous direction for X axis 0-1

Synchronization
360 0 0 - 0x3F P
direction control 1 Synchronous direction for Y axis 0-1
2 Synchronous direction for Z axis 0-1
3 Synchronous direction for A axis 0-1
4 Synchronous direction for B axis 0-1
5 Synchronous direction for C axis 0-1
Specifies the master axis when X axis is the

slave axis. For example, set this parameter to
Synchronous 2 if desiring to set Y axis as the master axis for
361 0 0-6 P
control X synchronous control.
0: disabled; 1- 6: X - C
Specifies the master axis when Y axis is the
Synchronous slave axis.
362 0 0-6 P
control Y
Specifies the master axis when Z axis is the
363 0 0-6 P
control Z
Specifies the master axis when A axis is the
364 0 0-6 P
control A
Specifies the master axis when B axis is the
365 0 0-6 P
control B
Specifies the master axis when C axis is the
366 0 0-6 P
control C
12-69
Special M relays for enabling synchronous control function:

Function description Special relay code
Trigger for synchronous control M1088
12
X slave axis follows the master axis M1089
Y slave axis follows the master axis M1090
Z slave axis follows the master axis M1091
A slave axis follows the master axis M1092
B slave axis follows the master axis M1093
C slave axis follows the master axis M1094
12-70
12.17.3 Command transfer
Application description: transfer the command for Z axis to A axis (transfer axis). Assume that
12
M20 is to enable transfer and M21 is to disable it, the settings are as follows.
1. Set Pr350 to 20.
2. Set Pr351 to 21.
3. Set Pr374 Transfer control A to 3.
After executing M20 to trigger M1098 (Trigger for transfer command) and M1102 (A axis
receives command from master axis), the system transfers the command that moves Z axis to A
axis (that is, Z axis does not move). If a command that moves the A axis is executed, an alarm
occurs since the transfer axis (A axis) cannot receive a motion command. Execute M21 to turn
off M1098 to stop the command transfer control function. Enabling (M20) and disabling (M21)
this function are only available in AUTO and MDI modes. Execute M21 to end the program. The
command transfer function is not available in JOG, MPG, and HOME modes.
Important:
(1) Once you set an axis as a transfer axis, you cannot set it as a master axis.
(2) Once you set an axis as a master axis, you cannot set it as a transfer axis.
(3) Multiple transfer axes can refer to the same master axis.
(4) The transfer function is not available in HOME mode.
(5) Pressing RESET does not disable the command transfer function.
(6) When the command is transferred from Z axis to A axis, the tool length compensation
function is available.
(7) A cutting cycle command for Z axis can be transferred.
Program:
G54X0Y0Z0A0
G90G54G0X10.Y10.Z10.
Z50.
A0
M20 (The controller pre-reads M20 and then enables command transfer control.)
Z0. (The Z-axis command actually moves the A axis)
Z111.
G4X2.
Z150.
M21 (The controller pre-reads M21 and then disables command transfer control.)
A100.
A51.
M30
12-71
Relevant parameters:
Para-
Default
value
12
No.
Halt M-code 1
0: disabled
Halt M-code 2
Halt M-code 3
Halt M-code Halt M-code 4
350 - 357 0 0 - 1000 P
1-8
Halt M-code 5
Halt M-code 6
Halt M-code 7
Halt M-code 8
Sets the transfer control direction.
Bit 0 - 5: transfer direction of X - C axes
0: same direction
Bit Function Range
Transfer control
370 0 Transfer direction X 0-1 0 0 - 0x3F P
direction
1 Transfer direction Y 0-1
2 Transfer direction Z 0-1
3 Transfer direction A 0-1
4 Transfer direction B 0-1
5 Transfer direction C 0-1
Specifies the X axis as the axis to receive the
transfer command. When transfer control is
enabled, the command is transferred to have
Transfer control the X axis move while the originally
371 commanded axis does not move. For example, 0 0-6 P
X
set this parameter to 2 if desiring to transfer the
control command from the Y axis.
Specifies the Y axis as the axis to receive the
Transfer control function is enabled, the command is
372 transferred to have the Y axis move while the 0 0-6 P
Y
Specifies the Z axis as the axis to receive the
373 transferred to have the Z axis move while the 0 0-6 P
Z
Specifies the A axis as the axis to receive the
374 transferred to have the A axis move while the 0 0-6 P
A
Specifies the B axis as the axis to receive the
375 transferred to have the B axis move while the 0 0-6 P
B
12-72
Para-
Default
value
No.
Specifies the C axis as the axis to receive the
12
376 transferred to have the C axis move while the 0 0-6 P
C
Relevant special M relays for transfer function:

Function description Special relay code
Trigger for transfer command M1098
X axis receives command from master axis M1099
Y axis receives command from master axis M1100
Z axis receives command from master axis M1101
A axis receives command from master axis M1102
B axis receives command from master axis M1103
C axis receives command from master axis M1104
Transfer function in execution M2228
12-73
12
12-74
Software (SOFT) Group 13
The SOFT group is for configuring user-defined screens with the CNCSoft software.
This chapter provides the example screens.
13.1 ScreenEditor software ····································································· 13-2
13-1
Software (SOFT) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual
With the SOFT group function, you can use ScreenEditor to configure the screens, which can
replace the function of the machine operation panel B or add customized extension functions.
13
Note: bold function names in a box (such as POS) mean the keys on machine operation panel A; bold
13.1 ScreenEditor software

 ScreenEditor
You can edit the screens of the controller with ScreenEditor which you can enter from the
main page of the Delta CNCSoft software as shown in Figure 13.1.1.
Figure 13.1.1
 After entering ScreenEditor, you can see the operation interface as shown in Figure 13.1.2.
Figure 13.1.2
13-2
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Software (SOFT) Group
 After compiling the screens and creating the screen data files, you can import the files to the
controller using the USB disk or the Internet, as shown in Figure 13.1.3.
13
Figure 13.1.3
13-3
Software (SOFT) Group Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual
13
13-4
MLC Special M Relay
and Special D Register
This chapter provides detailed descriptions for the special controlling devices of the
NC system, through which you can quickly check the MLC status in the NC system.
For more advanced control functions, refer to NC Series MLC Application Manual.
14.1 Introduction to MLC special M relay and special D register ······················ 14-2
14.2 Special M relay bit output (from MLC to NC) ········································ 14-3
14.2.1 MLC and NC systems related special M output ···························· 14-3
14.2.2 NC system related special M output ··········································· 14-4
14.2.3 NC axes related special M output ·············································· 14-6
14.2.4 Spindle related special M output ··············································· 14-7
14.3 Special M relay bit input (from NC to MLC) ·········································· 14-8
14.3.1 MLC and NC systems related special M input ······························ 14-8
14.3.2 NC system related special M input ············································· 14-9
14.3.3 M, S, T codes related special M input ········································14-10
14.3.4 NC axes related special M input ···············································14-11
14.3.5 Spindle, tool magazine, and MLC axes related special M input ·······14-13
14.3.6 Lathe Spindle / C axis mode related special M input ·····················14-13
14.4 Special D register output (from MLC to NC) ········································14-14
14.4.1 MLC and NC systems special D output ······································14-14
14.4.2 NC system related special D output ··········································14-15
14.4.3 NC axes related special D output ·············································14-16
14.5 Special D register input (from NC to MLC) ··········································14-17
14.5.1 MLC and NC systems related special D input ······························14-17
14.5.2 M, S, T codes related special D input ········································14-18
14.5.3 NC axes related special D input ···············································14-19
14.6 NC / MLC axis mode switch ····························································14-20
14-1
MLC Special M Relay and Special D Register Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual
14.1 Introduction to MLC special M relay and special D

register
14
The MLC (Motion Logic Control) and the NC are two independent systems. The MLC system
performs button triggering controls, MLC axis movements, and other logic controls, while the NC
system manages system and servo axis related functions. The MLC special M relays and D
registers serve as the I/O interface between these two systems for data exchange and signal
transmission.
Definition of output and input:

The output mentioned in this chapter refers to the signals sent to the NC system from the MLC
special M relays and D registers. The input refers to the signals sent to the MLC special M and
D from the NC system. The M letter prefixed codes are in bit format referring to signal 0 (OFF)
or 1 (ON). The D prefixed codes are in word format referring to numerical values such as 1000.
The MLC special M and D codes are all expressed in the form of M- and D- suffixed with four
digits.
In the following paragraphs, the special M relays are abbreviated as special M and special D
registers are abbreviated as special D.
Data exchanges between the two systems are categorized into four groups.
1: MLC bit output from MLC to NC (special M, bit output) (Refer to Chapter 14.2)
2: MLC bit input from NC to MLC (special M, bit input) (Refer to Chapter 14.3)
3: MLC word output from MLC to NC (special D, word output) (Refer to Chapter 14.4)
4: MLC word input from NC to MLC (special D, word input) (Refer to Chapter 14.5)
14-2
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual MLC Special M Relay and Special D Register
14.2 Special M relay bit output (from MLC to NC)

14.2.1 MLC and NC systems related special M output
14
When the special M status in the MLC system is changed, you can use the corresponding
variable to access the status in the NC system. For example, #1801 is paired with M1024. If
M1024 is on, the value of #1801 in the NC program is 1, and this value is 0 if M1024 is off.
Function name Special M Variable ID Function name Special M Variable ID
HMI output point 1 M1024 #1801 HMI output point 17 M1040 #1817
14-3
14.2.2 NC system related special M output
The special M relays in Sections 14.2.2 - 14.2.4 are for signal transmission from the MLC to NC
14
system. When you change the special M’s status, the NC system operates accordingly.
You can use the keys or knob to send the special M signal from the MLC to the NC system and
to switch between system modes or enable / disable the functions. Refer to the following table
for the special M used for the NC system modes and functions.
Function name Special M Description
You can use M1056 - M1059 to switch between system modes.
Binary
System mode selection: System
M1059 M1058 M1057 M1056 Decimal
0: auto execution (AUTO) mode
(Bit 3) (Bit 2) (Bit 1) (Bit 0)
1: edit (EDIT) M1056
0 0 0 0 0 AUTO
2: manual input (MDI) M1057
0 0 0 1 1 EDIT
3: MPG feeding (MPG) M1058
0 0 1 0 2 MDI
4: jog feeding (JOG) M1059
0 0 1 1 3 MPG
5: rapid feeding (RAPID)
0 1 0 0 4 JOG
6: homing (HOME)
0 1 0 1 5 RAPID
0 1 1 0 6 HOME
Single block execution M1060 In AUTO mode, program stops after one block is executed.
Cycle Start M1061 Auto execution signal.
NC stop M1062 The NC controller pauses after M1062 is triggered.
System stop M1063 The system stops operating.
After M1065 is triggered, the moving speed F of G01 in AUTO

Dummy execution M1065
mode refers to the feedrate specified in the D1062 register.
Optional stop key. When the program executes M01, the

Optional stop (M01 Pause) M1066
controller immediately stops.
The program skips the block with symbol '/' when this function is
Single block skip (‘/’) M1067
enabled.
Lock all axes movements M1068 Locks all axes movements of the machine (NC+MLC).
Lock Z axis movement M1069 Locks the Z axis movement of the machine.
The limit signal of each axis is ignored when this function is
Ignore axis limit M1070
enabled.
Locks M, S, and T codes. The program skips M, S, and T codes
Lock M, S, and T codes M1071
in the execution.
The MLC sends this signal after the system confirms that the
DMCNET connection
M1072 DMCNET connection is successful. Note that this signal signifies
successful
the connection is successful instead of the Servo On status.
Macro call initial The initial input of macro call (only works in AUTO mode and with
M1074
preparation correct macro ID).
Macro call activation M1075 Activates macro call.
When M1076 is triggered, the NC system resets
System reset M1076
(MLC > NC).
Set Pr308 [Bit 9] = 1 to disable the function of M99.
M99 stops M1077 Set M1077 to on, and the NC system stops machining when it
reads M99.
When the NC system reads M96, if M1078 is on, the system
M96 program interruption M1078
interrupts the main program and executes the subprogram.
Pr305 [Bit 5] = 1: after M1079 is triggered, the system
MLC emergency stop M1079
immediately stops.
During program execution, you can use the MPG to control the
MPG simulation M1080
speed of movement trajectories.
14-4

Pr51 [Bit 5] = 1: enables the inhibit zone protection.
Inhibit zone protection M1085
When this special M is off, the inhibit zone protection is effective.
Notification of MST code When M1152 is triggered, this signal informs the NC system that
14
M1152
execution complete the M, S, or T codes have completed the execution.
Tool magazine 1 moves Tool magazine 1 moves forward. When M1168 is triggered, the
M1168
forward standby tool pot (D1373) value adds 1.
Tool magazine 1 moves Tool magazine 1 moves backward. When M1169 is triggered, the
M1169
backward standby tool pot (D1373) value minus 1.
Exchanges tool data in tool magazine 1. Exchange data between
Tool 1 exchange M1170 the tool number in use (D1374) and the standby tool number
(D1371).
Tool magazine 1 reset M1171 Triggers the tool magazine 1 reset function.
Tool magazine 2 moves Tool magazine 2 moves forward. When M1172 is triggered, the
M1172
forward standby tool pot (D1377) value adds 1.
Tool magazine 2 moves Tool magazine 2 moves backward. When M1173 is triggered, the
M1173
backward standby tool pot (D1377) value minus 1.
Exchanges tool data in tool magazine 2. Exchange data between
Tool 2 exchange M1174 the current spindle number (D1378) and the command tool
number (D1375).
Tool magazine 2 reset M1175 Triggers the tool magazine 2 reset function.
Use the keys on the machine operation panel B as the MPG
Panel MPG pulse + M1118 function and send forward pulse signals. Refer to the description
for D1040 for the enabling method.
Use the keys on the machine operation panel B as the MPG
Panel MPG pulse - M1119 function and send reverse pulse signals. Refer to the description
for D1040 for the enabling method.
Off: the rotation speed command refers to the S code in the
Switch the spindle speed
M1307 program.
source
On: the rotation speed command refers to the value of D1148.
Breakpoint search M1567 Triggers the breakpoint search function.
Locks User 1 permission. Set Pr10015 [Bit 1] to 1 (Account
Lock User 1 permission M2934
permission activation method) to use the M2934 function.
Restrict program editing M2935 Restricts program editing of the controller.
14-5
14.2.3 NC axes related special M output
You can use the keys or knob to send the special M signal from the NC to the MLC system and
14
to switch between system modes or enable / disable the functions. Refer to the following special
M list for NC axis operations.
Function name Special M Function name Special M
Trigger for synchronous control M1088 Y axis homing control M1237
X slave axis follows the master axis M1089 Z axis homing control M1238
Y slave axis follows the master axis M1090 A axis homing control M1239
Z slave axis follows the master axis M1091 B axis homing control M1240
A slave axis follows the master axis M1092 C axis homing control M1241
B slave axis follows the master axis M1093 Cancel X axis 1st software limit M1248
C slave axis follows the master axis M1094 Cancel Y axis 1st software limit M1249
Trigger for transition command M1098 Cancel Z axis 1st software limit M1250
X axis receives command from the
M1099 Cancel A axis 1st software limit M1251
master axis
Y axis receives command from the
M1100 Cancel B axis 1st software limit M1252
master axis
Z axis receives command from the
M1101 Cancel C axis 1st software limit M1253
master axis
A axis receives command from the
M1102 Lock X axis M1257
master axis
B axis receives command from the
M1103 Lock Y axis M1258
master axis
C axis receives command from the
M1104 Lock Z axis M1259
master axis
X axis forward jog control M1216 Lock A axis M1260
Y axis forward jog control M1217 Lock B axis M1261
Z axis forward jog control M1218 Lock C axis M1262
A axis forward jog control M1219 X axis Servo Off M1266
B axis forward jog control M1220 Y axis Servo Off M1267
C axis forward jog control M1221 Z axis Servo Off M1268
X axis reverse jog control M1226 A axis Servo Off M1269
Y axis reverse jog control M1227 B axis Servo Off M1270
Z axis reverse jog control M1228 C axis Servo Off M1271
A axis reverse jog control M1229 U axis Servo Off M1272
B axis reverse jog control M1230 V axis Servo Off M1273
C axis reverse jog control M1231 W axis Servo Off M1274
X axis homing control M1236 - -
14-6
14.2.4 Spindle related special M output
Refer to the following special M list for the spindle operation control.
14
Spindle forward rotation M1120 Spindle positioning control M1124
Spindle reverse rotation M1121 Spindle retraction after tapping M1125
M1122 Lathe spindle / C axis mode switch M1126

Spindle gear ratio selection
M1123 Spindle gain switch M1127
Note:
The spindle gear ratio is selected by the combination of M1122 (Bit 0) and M1123 (Bit 1) with the range of
0 - 3 representing four sets of gear ratio (Pr422 - Pr429).
Example: to use the settings of “Gear ratio numerator 4 (Pr428)” and “Gear ratio denominator 4 (Pr429)”,
select 3 (11 in binary format), and the corresponding two bits in the MLC are: M1122 = on and M1123 = on.
14-7
14.3 Special M relay bit input (from NC to MLC)

14.3.1 MLC and NC systems related special M input
14
You can write values to variables #1864 - #1895 in the NC program and then access and
monitor the signal status of the HMI input points in the MLC system. For example, #1864 is
paired with M2080. If you set #1864 to 1 in the NC program, M2028 is on in the MLC program.
On the other hand, if you set #1864 to 0 in the NC program, M2028 is off in the MLC program.
Function name Special M Variable Function name Special M Variable

HMI input point 1 M2080 #1864 HMI input point 17 M2096 #1880
14-8
14.3.2 NC system related special M input
You can get the NC system’s current status with the signals sent from the NC system to the
14
MLC special M. In addition, the MLC uses these signals as the feedback for status
synchronization. The following table lists the NC system status and the corresponding MLC
special M relays.
Machine started and system
M2112 The NC system is ready.
ready
System alarm message M2113 A macro alarm occurs in the NC system. (MR__)
The system stops immediately after you press the
System emergency stop M2114
EMERGENCY STOP key.
Servo enabled M2115 Servo ON.
HSI1 M2142 High speed input point 1 (G31 skip signal input).
HSI2 M2143 High speed input point 2 (G31 skip signal input).
M96 (program interruption) in
M2216 M96 (program interruption) is in operation.
operation
Macro call initial preparation Initialization setting for the macro call function is complete
M2224
complete (only works in AUTO mode and with correct macro ID).
Macro call execution M2225 Macro call execution.
Macro call error M2226 Macro call error.

Synchronous function in The NC system sends this signal when the synchronous
M2227
execution function is in execution.
The NC system sends this signal when the transfer function
Transfer function in execution M2228
is in execution.
This special M relay is on when the MPG is in forward
Special M for MPG forward M2232 operation. This M relay is off when the MPG is in reverse
operation or stationary.
M99 stop function M2238 When the NC system reads M99, this special M relay is on.
Channel alarm message M2240 An error occurs in the NC channel.
Auto execution (AUTO) M2241 The NC sends this signal when it is in AUTO mode.
Edit (EDIT) M2242 The NC sends this signal when it is in EDIT mode.
Manual input (MDI) M2243 The NC system sends this signal when it is in MDI mode.
MPG feeding (MPG) M2244 The NC system sends this signal when it is in MPG mode.
Jog feeding (JOG) M2245 The NC system sends this signal when it is in JOG mode.
Rapid feeding (RAPID) M2246 The NC system sends this signal when it is in RAPID mode.
Homing (HOME) M2247 The NC system sends this signal when it is in HOME mode.
The NC system sends this signal when the program pauses
Single block execution M2249
after executing one single block.
The NC system sends this signal when the program starts
Cycle Start M2250
running.
Pause M2251 The NC system sends this signal when the system pauses.
M00 program stop M2252 The NC system sends this signal when executing M00.
M01 program stop (optional) M2253 The NC system sends this signal when executing M01.
M02 end of program M2254 The NC system sends this signal when executing M02.
14-9

End of M30 and return M2255 The NC system sends this signal when executing M30.
The NC system sends this signal when the machining
14
Program ends M2271
program ends.
14.3.3 M, S, T codes related special M input
When the M, S, or T codes are executed in the program, the NC system sends the
corresponding special M signals to the MLC. For example, when M03 is executed in the NC
program, the system sets M2208 to on in the MLC program accordingly. The following table lists
the special M relays corresponding to the M, S, and T codes.
When the M code is executed in the program, the NC sends the
corresponding special M signal to the MLC, so M2208 is set to on and
instructs the specified device to operate accordingly. Until M1152
(Notification of MST code execution complete) is triggered, M2208 is
set to off. When waiting for the MLC to return M1152, the NC pauses
M code execution M2208 the program execution. After the MLC returns M1152, the NC
resumes executing the program.
The NC does not trigger M2208 when the program executes M00,
M01, M02, M30, M98, M99, or the M codes that are used for macro
call.
When the S code is executed in the program, the NC sends the
S code execution M2209 set to off. When waiting for the MLC to return M1152, the NC pauses
the program execution. After the MLC returns M1152, the NC
The NC does not trigger M2209 when an S code is used for macro
call.
When the T code is executed in the program, the NC sends the
set to off. When waiting for the MLC to return M1152, the NC pauses
T code execution M2210 the program execution. After the MLC returns M1152, the NC
The NC does not trigger M2210 when a T code is used for macro call.
M2210 is related to the station ID in the tool magazine. The NC
system triggers M2210 only when the T code value is set within the
specified range of tool number for the tool magazine parameter.
14-10
14.3.4 NC axes related special M input
There are three available methods for hardware signal input.
14
1. The AXIS 1~4 connector at the rear side of the controller*.
2. Remote I/O. Select the axes (as shown in the yellow mark in the figure), and the signals are
input through RIO. The signals of the unselected axes are input through AXIS 1~4
connector.
3. Pr2006 [Bit 14]: origin / limit planning.
Note: the AXIS 1~4 connector is only available on the NC3XX series milling controllers.
The following table lists the special M relays corresponding to the hardware limits, homing
signals, and axis movements of the NC axes.
Port 1 positive hardware limit M2144 X axis homing complete M2272
Port 1 negative hardware limit M2145 Y axis homing complete M2273
Port 1 home signal M2146 Z axis homing complete M2274
Port 2 positive hardware limit M2148 A axis homing complete M2275
Port 2 negative hardware limit M2149 B axis homing complete M2276
Port 2 home signal M2150 C axis homing complete M2277
Port 3 positive hardware limit M2152 X axis positioned at the 2nd reference point M2286
Port 3 negative hardware limit M2153 Y axis positioned at the 2nd reference point M2287
Port 3 home signal M2154 Z axis positioned at the 2nd reference point M2288
Port 4 positive hardware limit M2156 A axis positioned at the 2nd reference point M2289
Port 4 negative hardware limit M2157 B axis positioned at the 2nd reference point M2290
Port 4 home signal M2158 C axis positioned at the 2nd reference point M2291
Port 5 positive hardware limit M2160 X axis is moving M2320
Port 5 negative hardware limit M2161 Y axis is moving M2321
Port 5 home signal M2162 Z axis is moving M2322
Port 6 positive hardware limit M2164 A axis is moving M2323
Port 6 negative hardware limit M2165 B axis is moving M2324
Port 6 home signal M2166 C axis is moving M2325
X axis is moving in forward direction M2336 X axis is moving in reverse direction M2345
Y axis is moving in forward direction M2337 Y axis is moving in reverse direction M2346
Z axis is moving in forward direction M2338 Z axis is moving in reverse direction M2347
14-11

A axis is moving in forward direction M2339 A axis is moving in reverse direction M2348
B axis is moving in forward direction M2340 B axis is moving in reverse direction M2349
14
C axis is moving in forward direction M2341 C axis is moving in reverse direction M2350
U axis is moving in forward direction M2342 U axis is moving in reverse direction M2351
V axis is moving in forward direction M2343 V axis is moving in reverse direction M2352
W axis is moving in forward direction M2344 W axis is moving in reverse direction M2353
X axis positioned at the 3rd
M2295 X axis positioned at the 4th reference point M2368
reference point
Y axis positioned at the 3rd
M2296 Y axis positioned at the 4th reference point M2369
reference point
Z axis positioned at the 3rd
M2297 Z axis positioned at the 4th reference point M2370
reference point
A axis positioned at the 3rd
M2298 A axis positioned at the 4th reference point M2371
reference point
B axis positioned at the 3rd
M2299 B axis positioned at the 4th reference point M2372
reference point
C axis positioned at the 3rd
M2300 C axis positioned at the 4th reference point M2373
reference point
U axis positioned at the 3rd
M2301 U axis positioned at the 4th reference point M2374
reference point
V axis positioned at the 3rd
M2302 V axis positioned at the 4th reference point M2375
reference point
W axis positioned at the 3rd
M2303 W axis positioned at the 4th reference point M2376
reference point
14-12
14.3.5 Spindle, tool magazine, and MLC axes related special M input
During rigid tapping or before tool exchanges, you can use the following special M relays to
14
check if the spindle is positioned and whether it reaches the target speed.
Spindle reaches the target speed M2256 Spindle is in the rigid tapping mode M2259
Spindle reaches zero speed M2257 Rigid tapping interruption M2260
Spindle positioning complete M2258 Spindle homing complete M2281
14.3.6 Lathe Spindle / C axis mode related special M input

If the NC is in the Spindle mode and executes the M code for
Spindle-to-C axis mode switch and M1126 is on, the NC switches
from the Spindle to the C axis mode. After the switch is complete,
M2239 is on and the NC is in C axis mode.
Lathe spindle /
M2239 If the NC is in the C axis mode and executes the M code for C axis-
C axis mode
to-Spindle mode switch and M1126 is off, the NC switches from the C
axis to the Spindle mode. After the switch is complete, M2239 is off
and the NC is in Spindle mode.
The system is in Spindle mode and M2239 is off by default.
14-13
14.4 Special D register output (from MLC to NC)

14.4.1 MLC and NC systems special D output
14
You can write values to the registers for HMI output points D1024 - D1039 in the MLC system
and then access and monitor the values with variables #1833 - #1848 in the NC system. For
example, #1833 is paired with D1024. If the value of D1024 in the MLC program is 100, the
value of #1833 is 100.
Refer to the following table for the registers for the HMI output points in the MLC system and
their corresponding variables in the NC system (MLC > NC):
Function name Special D Variable Function name Special D Variable
HMI output point 1 D1024 #1833 HMI output point 9 D1032 #1841
14-14
14.4.2 NC system related special D output
The special D in this section is for data transmission from the MLC to the NC system. You can
14
use the keys or control knob on the machine to have the MLC program output the special D
value to the NC system, and to set the MPG function and change the feedrate. Refer to the
following table for the special D functions.
Function name Special D Description
Set the value using D1022 in the Process screen or with
the MLC input.
Number of the processing
D1018 If you set Pr10015 [Bit 6] to 0, the display source is D1022.
complete pieces (32-bit)
If you set Pr10015 [Bit 6] to 1, the display source is D1018
(D1019).
the MLC input.
Number of the processing target
D1020 If you set Pr10015 [Bit 6] to 0, the display source is D1023.
(32-bit)
If you set Pr10015 [Bit 6] to 1, the display source is D1020
(D1021).
Number of the processing Set the value using D1022 in the Process screen or with
D1022
complete pieces the MLC input.
Number of the processing target D1023
the MLC input.
Sets the MPG operation mode. Set D1040 to 0 to use the
external MPG. Set D1040 to 10 to use the keys on the
MPG operation mode number D1040
machine operation panel B as the MPG function, with the
pulse control trigger flags of M1118 and M1119.
MPG operation channel Designates the MPG operation channel. The default value
D1041
selection is 0.
Sets the MPG pulse magnifications. It usually works with
the physical MPG. When you rotate one MPG scale, the
actual movement is the minimum unit multiplied by the
Sets the MPG pulse
D1042 pulse magnification. For example, if you set D1042 to 1
magnification
and set Pr301 to 3 (set the minimum unit with three
decimal places), the actual moving amount is 1 x 0.001 =
0.001 mm/pulse.
Selects the axis to move with the MPG. Set 0 for X axis, 1
Select the axis with MPG D1043
for Y axis, and 2 for Z axis.
Specifies the macro call file name O9xxx. For example, if
Macro call file name D1111 D1111 writes K9100, the system calls the macro named
O9100.
When the lathe parameter Pr308 [Bit 13] is 1, D1115
Lathe tool number selection D1115 determines the lathe tool number display.
Range: 0 - 65535.
When M1308 is on, the spindle speed command refers to
Spindle speed command D1148
the setting of D1148.
14-15
14.4.3 NC axes related special D output
The MLC uses the special D registers to send signals to the NC system, so it can change the
14
feedrate in each NC system mode. Refer to the following table for the special D functions.
Sets the percentage of the cutting feedrate (F) in the NC
program. Example:
Cutting feedrate adjustment D1056 If you set F to 1000 and the current value of D1056 is 50,
it means the actual command speed is 500 mm/min (=
1000 x 50%).
Sets the percentage of G00’s speed (rapid movement).
For example, if the rapid movement speed is 6000, and
Rapid movement speed adjustment D1058
D1058 is set to 50, it means the actual speed of G00 is
3000 mm/min (= 6000 x 50%).
Sets the percentage for the S value specified in the NC
program. For example, if S1000 is given in the program
Spindle speed adjustment D1060
and D1060 is set to 30, it means the actual spindle speed
is 300 rpm (= 1000 x 30%).
Sets movement speed F for dry run in JOG or AUTO
Sets the jog feeding and dry run
D1062 mode. If you set D1062 to 50, it indicates F50 (mm/min)
speed
with the range of 0 - 65535 mm/min.
14-16
14.5 Special D register input (from NC to MLC)

14.5.1 MLC and NC systems related special D input
14
You can write the values to variables #1896 - #1911 in the NC program and then access and
monitor the values in the registers for HMI input points in the MLC system. For example, #1896
is paired with D1336. If the value of D1336 in the MLC program is 101, the value of #1896 is
101. In other words, the value of D1336 in the MLC program changes with #1896 in the NC
system.
Refer to the following table for the registers for HMI input points in the MLC system and their
corresponding variables in the NC system (NC > MLC):
Function name Special D Variable Function name Special D Variable
HMI input point 1 D1336 #1896 HMI input point 9 D1344 #1904
14-17
14.5.2 M, S, T codes related special D input
When the M, S, and T codes are executed in the program, the NC system sends the
14
corresponding special M signals to the MLC and inputs the corresponding values to the special
D registers. For example, when the NC program is executing M03, D1368 displays 3 in the MLC
program. Refer to the following table for descriptions.
When an M code is executed in a program, the index value of the M
code is stored in register D1368. For example, when M03 command
is executed, the value of D1368 is 3. The M codes mentioned here do
M code data D1368 not include the system-defined M codes such as M00, M01, M02,
M30, M96, M97, M98, M99, and the M codes used for macro call. If
one of these M codes are executed, the system does not write the
value to D1368.
When an S code is executed in a program, the index value of the S
S code data D1369
code is stored in register D1369.
When a T code is executed in a program, the index value of the T
code is stored in register D1370. When the T code has been used for
T code data macro call, the system does not write the value to D1370. You must
D1370
(command) set the T code value within the specified range of tool number for the
tool magazine parameter (Pr338 or Pr341) for the T data to correctly
display.
Standby tool number The Register magazine in tool magazine 1 displays the tool number
D1371
(tool magazine 1) corresponding to the standby tool pot (D1373).
The deviation between the positions specified in D1370 (T code data)
and D1371 (Standby tool number) in tool magazine 1. When the tool
Tool pot deviation
D1372 magazine rotates forward or backward during tool exchange (M1168 /
(tool magazine 1)
M1169), the current tool magazine needs to rotate according to the
value in D1372 for compensating the offset.
Standby tool pot
D1373 The standby tool pot number in tool magazine 1.
(tool magazine 1)
Tool number in use
D1374 The tool number in use in tool magazine 1.
(tool magazine 1)
Standby tool number The Register magazine in tool magazine 2 displays the tool number
D1375
(tool magazine 2) corresponding to the standby tool pot (D1377).
The deviation between the positions specified in D1370 (T code data)
and D1375 (Standby tool number) in tool magazine 2. When the tool
Tool pot deviation
D1376 magazine rotates forward or backward during tool exchange (M1172 /
(tool magazine 2)
M1173), the current tool magazine needs to rotate according to the
value in D1376 for compensating the offset.
Standby tool pot
D1377 The standby tool pot number in tool magazine 2.
(tool magazine 2)
Tool number in use
D1378 The tool number in use in tool magazine 2.
(tool magazine 2)
Feedrate D1379 Accesses the feedrate during cutting.
You can use D1380 (32-bit) to access the spindle actual speed. You
can use Pr399 [Bit 12] to change the value displaying source.
Spindle actual speed D1380
Pr399 [Bit 12] = 0: the source is the S code command in the program.
Pr399 [Bit 12] = 1: the source is the spindle current speed.
Workpiece
D1450 Displays the current workpiece coordinates.
coordinate group
14-18
14.5.3 NC axes related special D input
The NC system sends the special D signals to the MLC system. And you can use the special D
14
to access the data such as machine coordinates, absolute coordinates, and current percentage
through the MLC. The descriptions are as follows.
X axis machine coordinate D1384 X axis current machine coordinate.
Y axis machine coordinate D1386 Y axis current machine coordinate.
Z axis machine coordinate D1388 Z axis current machine coordinate.
A axis machine coordinate D1390 A axis current machine coordinate.
B axis machine coordinate D1392 B axis current machine coordinate.
C axis machine coordinate D1394 C axis current machine coordinate.
U axis machine coordinate D1396 U axis current machine coordinate.
V axis machine coordinate D1398 V axis current machine coordinate.
W axis machine coordinate D1400 W axis current machine coordinate.
X axis absolute coordinate D1402 X axis current absolute coordinate.
Y axis absolute coordinate D1404 Y axis current absolute coordinate.
Z axis absolute coordinate D1406 Z axis current absolute coordinate.
A axis absolute coordinate D1408 A axis current absolute coordinate.
B axis absolute coordinate D1410 B axis current absolute coordinate.
C axis absolute coordinate D1412 C axis current absolute coordinate.
U axis absolute coordinate D1414 U axis current absolute coordinate.
V axis absolute coordinate D1416 V axis current absolute coordinate.
W axis absolute coordinate D1418 W axis current absolute coordinate.
X axis DMCNET current monitoring D1420 X axis current percentage at present.
Y axis DMCNET current monitoring D1421 Y axis current percentage at present.
Z axis DMCNET current monitoring D1422 Z axis current percentage at present.
A axis DMCNET current monitoring D1423 A axis current percentage at present.
B axis DMCNET current monitoring D1424 B axis current percentage at present.
C axis DMCNET current monitoring D1425 C axis current percentage at present.
U axis DMCNET current monitoring D1426 U axis current percentage at present.
V axis DMCNET current monitoring D1427 V axis current percentage at present.
W axis DMCNET current monitoring D1428 W axis current percentage at present.
SP1 DMCNET current monitoring D1429 Spindle 1 current percentage at present.
SP2 DMCNET current monitoring D1430 Spindle 2 current percentage at present.
14-19
14.6 NC / MLC axis mode switch

You can use the special M to dynamically switch between the NC axis and MLC axis modes,
14
and control the position and speed in the MLC axis mode with special M and special D.
NC / MLC axis mode switch:

Axis Special M for NC / MLC axis switch Special M for NC / MLC axis status
X axis M1200 M2354
Y axis M1201 M2355
Z axis M1202 M2356
A axis M1203 M2357
B axis M1204 M2358
C axis M1205 M2359
U axis M1206 M2360
V axis M1207 M2361
W axis M1208 M2362
MLC axis mode control / status:

Special M Special M
Special M Special M
Special M for switching Special D for
for Special D for
for between for indicating
Axis absolute / for feed indicating
activating MLC positioning position /
incremental command the axis is
MLC axis position / command speed
command moving
speed mode reached
X axis M1184 M1280 M1289 D1064 D1082 M2304 M2320
Y axis M1185 M1281 M1290 D1066 D1084 M2305 M2321
Z axis M1186 M1282 M1291 D1068 D1086 M2306 M2322
A axis M1187 M1283 M1292 D1070 D1088 M2307 M2323
B axis M1188 M1284 M1293 D1072 D1090 M2308 M2324
C axis M1189 M1285 M1294 D1074 D1092 M2309 M2325
U axis M1190 M1286 M1295 D1076 D1094 M2310 M2326
V axis M1191 M1287 M1296 D1078 D1096 M2311 M2327
W axis M1192 M1288 M1297 D1080 D1098 M2312 M2328
ALL - M1194 - - - - -
14-20
Troubleshooting 15
This chapter provides the information about the alarms and troubleshooting methods
for the NC system. Search this chapter for the methods of handling the NC system
related malfunctions.
15.1 Alarm description ············································································ 15-2

15.1.1 MLC errors (1200 - 13FF)························································· 15-3
15.1.2 Servo errors (1E00) ································································ 15-4
15.1.3 Remote I/O errors (1F00) ························································· 15-5
15.1.4 HMI related alarms (3010 - 3FFF) ·············································· 15-5
15.1.5 NC system errors (4200 - 4FFF) ················································ 15-7
15.1.6 Machining related alarms (B000 - B0FF)·····································15-10
15.1.7 Tool compensation related alarms (B100 - B1FF) ·························15-12
15.1.8 Lathe related alarms (B300 - B3FF) ···········································15-13
15.1.9 Command related alarms (B600 - B6FF; B64x not included) ···········15-14
alarms (B640 - B645) ···························································15-17
15.1.11 Lathe cycle command alarms (B10D, B6A1 - B6A5) ····················15-17
15-1
Troubleshooting Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual
15.1 Alarm description

The CNC alarms can be divided into three categories, which are system alarms, user-defined
15
alarms, and user-defined macro alarms. This chapter mainly explains the system related alarms
while the rest are user-defined.
Alarm category Alarm code Alarm Description
System alarms ____ The system alarms caused by system error or operation error.
The user-defined alarms which you use with the MLC program.
User-defined alarms A_ When the A_ device is triggered, the alarm corresponding to
the A_ device also occurs.
The user-defined macro alarm works with variable #6000. You
User-defined macro
MR_ can have the alarm triggered and have the corresponding
alarms
macro alarm displayed on the controller.
The system alarms are divided into MLC related alarms, HMI related alarms, and NC related
alarms by function.
System alarm
Alarm code range Subcategory Description
category
1200 - 12FF MLC system errors -
1300 - 13FF Ethernet errors -
This alarm displays the information
MLC related alarms 1E00 Servo errors about the servo station number in
error and error code.
This alarm displays the information
1F00 Remote I/O errors about the remote I/O station
number in error.
HMI related alarms 3010 - 3FFF HMI errors -
4200 - 4FFF NC system errors -
According to the high-byte of the
alarm code, you can identify which
channel is in error:
BXXX: CH0
CXXX: CH1 (reserved)
DXXX: CH2 (reserved)
NC related alarms
B000 - EFFF NC channel errors EXXX: CH3 (reserved)
These types of errors are also
displayed differently according to
functions. Some alarms carry data
and others don't. Thus, you can
use the alarm code to determine
whether the alarm carries data or
not.
15-2
Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual Troubleshooting
15.1.1 MLC errors (1200 - 13FF)
Alarm code Name Cause and corrective action
15
An error occurs when the MLC accesses the NC
NC memory access error memory.
1200
NC MEMORY ERROR
Restart the controller or send it back for servicing.
NC not ready The startup of the NC system is not complete.
1201
NC NOT READY Restart the controller or send it back for servicing.
Memory error NC memory buffer error or not ready.
1202
INCORRECT NC BUF DATA Restart the controller or send it back for servicing.
Output port does not exist NC output port does not exist.
1203
NC PORT NOT EXIST Check the axis parameter setting.
MLC code clear error Failed to clear the MLC codes.
1204
MLC CODE ERASE FAIL Send the controller back for servicing.
MLC flash memory error Failed to write the MLC codes to the flash memory.
1205
MLC CODE FLASH FAIL Restart the controller or send it back for servicing.
SRAM error SRAM write-in error.
1206
SRAM FAIL Send the controller back for servicing.
An error occurs when the system accesses
Host I/O channel error the host I/O.
1207
ON BOARD I/O ACCESS ERROR
An error occurs when the system accesses the
Remote I/O channel error remote I/O.
1208
REMOTE I/O ACCESS ERROR
NC parameter error NC parameters are not set or initialized.
120A
NC PARAMETER EMPTY Re-initialize the parameters.
Compensation PAR error Compensation parameter write-in error.
120B
COMP INIT ERROR Reload the compensation parameters.
An error occurs when the system clears the
Compen. PAR clear error compensation parameter in memory.
120C
COMP MEM ERASE FAIL
Reload the compensation parameters.
An error occurs when the system writes the
Compen. PAR write-in error compensation parameters to memory.
120D
COMP MEM WRITE FAIL
Reload the compensation parameters.
PAR initialization error Parameter initialization error.
120E
DEFAULT INIT ERROR Re-initialize the parameters.
Memory clear error Memory clear error.
120F
DEFAULT MEM ERASE FAIL Restart the controller or send it back for servicing.
Memory write-in error Memory write-in error or memory initialization error.
1210
DEFAULT MEM WRITE FAIL Restart the controller or send it back for servicing.
Servo axis does not exist Parameter setting error.
1211
SRV AXIS NOT EXIST Check the parameter settings.
Servo axis PAR type error Parameter setting error.
1212
SRV TYPE NOT EXIST Check the parameter settings.
DMCNET initialization error DMCNET initialization error.
1213
DMCNET INIT ERROR Make sure the DMCNET cable is securely connected.
Non-volatile memory error Non-volatile memory error.
1214
FRAM FAIL Restart the controller or send it back for servicing.
MLC and NC bottom layer communication error.
Internal comm. error
1215 1. Use the correct firmware version.
INTERNAL COMM. ERROR
2. Set the correct channel parameters.
15-3

The following conditions occur when the MLC is in
execution:
 The divisor of the division command is 0.
15
 The jump target position of the CJ/CALL command is
invalid.
MLC PRG error  The number of digits displayed in the BCD command
1216
MLC CODE ERROR is invalid.
 The table number of the VRT command is invalid.
 MLC code error.
1. Check and correct the MLC program.
2. Reload the MLC program.
Current number of MLC parameters in the internal
memory do not match the number of parameters
MLC PAR does not match planned in the firmware.
1217
MLC PAR MISMATCH
Update firmware or send the controller back for
servicing.
Network com. error Check the network connection.
1300
ETHERNET ERROR Restart the controller or send it back for servicing.
15.1.2 Servo errors (1E00)

[1530]: alarm signal (DI) on the pulse card is
triggered.
Check the error cause of the connected drive.
[1531]: this alarm occurs when the pulse card
generates more than 24,000 pulses within 1 ms.
Check the controller's encoder pulse number setting
and make sure the motor speed is within the range.
[1532]: pulse leakage. When the motor is stopped,
the pulse card compares the command pulse number
with the feedback pulse number. If the pulse number
Servo error difference is greater than 1% of the encoder
1E00
SERVO ERROR resolution, this alarm occurs.
1. Check if the signal traces are shielded.
2. Check if the equipment is properly grounded.
[1560]: station number repetition error.
Check the channel parameter station number setting.
Check the pulse card station number switch knob
setting.
Check the drive station number P3-00 setting.
Refer to the relevant servo drive user manuals for the
definition and troubleshooting of other related errors.
15-4
15.1.3 Remote I/O error (1F00)
15
Remote I/O error.
Remote I/O error
1F00 Check the remote I/O connection or replace the
REMOTE I/O ERROR
remote I/O board.
15.1.4 HMI related alarms (3010 - 3FFF)

HMI communication interface An error occurs when the system establishes the
3010 establishing error HMI communication interface.
INTERFACE RX CREATE ERROR Restart the controller or send it back for servicing.
HMI communication memory area An error occurs when the system creates the HMI
3011 creating error communication memory area.
RX THREAD CREATE ERROR Restart the controller or send it back for servicing.
An error occurs when the system creates the HMI
HMI interface command area error interface command area.
3012
IF CMD THREAD CREATE ERROR
HMI interface memory area error HMI interface memory area error.
3013
SRAM VERIFY ERROR Restart the controller or send it back for servicing.
HMI interface communication port error HMI interface communication port error.
3014
INTERFACE RX PORT ERROR Restart the controller or send it back for servicing.
MLC interface memory area error MLC interface memory area error.
3015
MLC SRAM VERIFY ERROR Restart the controller or send it back for servicing.
HMI file transmission error HMI file transmission error.
3016
INVALID REQUEST FILE Restart the controller or send it back for servicing.
HMI data transmission error HMI data transmission error.
3017
REQUEST FILE MISMATCH Restart the controller or send it back for servicing.
FTP PAR setting error Incorrect FTP setting.
3018
INVALID FTP PARAMETER Reconfirm FTP related settings of the controller.
Invalid file name Invalid file name.
3100
INVALID FILE NUMBER Modify the file name.
Exceeded subroutine call LVL The macro call exceeded 8 layers.
3101
EXCEED MAX FILE LEVEL Check the macro program.
Non-G code character error Non-G code character error.
3102
ILLEGAL GCODE CHAR Check the G code and modify the program.
System internal memory area is in error.
Memory error
3103 Use the system recovery function or send the
MEM CHECKSUM ERROR
controller back for servicing.
System internal parameter memory area is in
Internal PAR CRC error error.
3200
PARAMETER CRC ERROR Use the system recovery function or send the
System MLC program memory area is in error.
MLC PRG error
3201 Reload the MLC program or send the controller
MLC CRC ERROR
back for servicing.
No CF card is inserted or the inserted CF card is
CF card read failed invalid.
3202
CF CARD READ ERROR Make sure the CF card is correctly installed or
replace the CF card.
15-5

The CF card is not correctly inserted or does not
PAR backup failed have sufficient storage space.
3203
PAR BACKUP FILE ERROR
15
Make sure the CF card is correctly installed or
check the CF card storage capacity.
The CF card is not correctly inserted or does not
MLC backup failed have sufficient storage space.
3204
MLC BACKUP FILE ERROR Make sure the CF card is correctly installed or
check the CF card storage capacity.
The usage duration has expired.
Machine is locked
3205 Contact the equipment manufacturer to unlock or
CNC MACHINE LOCK
extend the machine usage duration.
There are system parameters with set values
PAR value exceeds the range exceeding the allowable range.
3206
PARAMETER VALUE OUT OF RANGE
Check and modify the parameter values.
Failed to load the external device driver with the
COM port DLL load error software panel.
3207
LOAD COMM DLL ERR Update the software panel to reload the external
device driver.
System usage duration expiring reminder.
Machine to be locked soon
3208 Contact the equipment manufacturer to unlock or
MACHINE WILL BE LOCKED
extend the machine usage duration.
Sys updated, please reboot The system update is complete and requires
3209 UPDATE FINISHED, PLEASE REBOOT restarting.
SYS Restart the controller.
System battery is low The system battery is low.
320A
SYSTEM LOW BATTERY Replace the controller battery.
The connection between the software panel and
COM port disconnection the external device is disconnected.
3210
COMM PORT DISCONNECT Check the connection settings between the
controller and the external device.
Failed to open the external device driver with the
COM port DLL open error software panel.
3211
OPEN COMM DLL ERR Update the software panel to reload the external
device driver.
An error occurs when the external device driver is
Failed to create COM port loaded with the software panel.
3212
COM PORT CREATE FAIL Update the software panel and make sure the
setting of the external link file is correct.
Failed to load the TCPIP driver with the software
Load TCPIP DLL Err panel.
3213
TCPIP LOAD DLL FAIL Update the software panel to reload the external
device driver.
Network connection is in error.
TCPIP comm. disconnection
3214 Check the network connection or connection
TCPIP DISCON
status.
Failed to initialize the network communication.
Network comm. init. failed
3215 Check the network connection or connection
ETHERNET INIT FAIL
status.
No response from the bottom layer after resetting.
System reset error
3216 Update the firmware or send the controller back
SYSTEM RESET FAIL
for servicing.
Failed to remotely enable the backup import.
Failed to import full backup
3217 Check the operating mode. Make sure the
FAIL TO IMPORT FULL BACKUP
backup storage device is correctly installed.
15-6

Failed to remotely enable the backup export.
Failed to export full backup
3218 Check the operating mode. Make sure the
FAIL TO EXPORT FULL BACKUP
backup storage device is correctly installed.
3219
Auto update is set, please reboot
AUTO UPDATE IS SET, PLEASE
REBOOT SYS
Failed to remotely enable the firmware update
function.
Cycle the power to start the automatic firmware
update function. You must put the firmware file in
15
the [pkt] folder in the root directory of the USB
disk.
Failed to update the remote system firmware.
After checking the following conditions, reset the
automatic firmware update function.
Sys. update failed, please reboot
3220  Firmware update model error.
UPDATE FAIL, PLEASE REBOOT SYS
 File format does not match.
 Firmware update version is not supported.
 Controller emergency stop is not pressed.
15.1.5 NC system errors (4200 - 4FFF)

Homing has not been executed for each axis
Execute homing before automatic operation.
4200
EXECUTE HOME RETURN
Execute homing for each axis.
The origin coordinates for the absolute type
Absolute origin setting motor are not established.
4201
RESET ABS
Go to [DGN] to execute ABS RST.
An error occurs when the MLC accesses the NC
MLC is not ready memory.
4300
MLC ACCESS MEM ERROR Restart the controller, update firmware, or send
the controller back for servicing.
The MLC is not ready.
MLC is not ready
4301 Restart the controller, update firmware, or send
HOST NOT READY
Failed to clear the I/O module program.
I/O module program clearing failed
4302 Update the I/O module firmware or send the
FPGA ERASE ERROR
Failed to write the I/O module program.
I/O module program write-in failed
FPGA FLASH ERROR
Failed to clear the NC system program.
NC system program clearing failed
PROG ERASE ERROR
Failed to install the NC system program.
NC system program installation failed
PROG FLASH ERROR
Failed to clear the macro program.
Macro clearing failed
4306 Restart the controller and execute the macro
MACRO ERASE ERROR
internal memory function.
Failed to install the macro program.
Macro installation failed
4307 Restart the controller and execute the macro
MACRO FLASH ERROR
internal memory function.
15-7

An error occurs when the system loads the G
G code loading error code.
4308
ILLEGAL PROGRAM COUNT
15
Check the machining program.
The I/O module program is not initialized.
I/O module PRG not initialized
FPGA CODE NOT EXIST
The I/O module memory is corrupted.
I/O module memory corrupted
FPGA CODE LENGTH ERROR
The I/O module memory is corrupted.
I/O module memory corrupted
FPGA CODE CORRUPTED
The I/O module status is in error.
I/O module status error
4313 Check if the I/O board is firmly installed and the
FPGA STATUS REPLY ERROR
wiring is securely connected.
Program configuration of the I/O module is in
I/O module PRG configuration error error.
4314
FPGA CONF DONE ERROR Check if the I/O board is firmly installed and the
wiring is securely connected.
The I/O board hardware interface is in error.
I/O board hardware interface error
FPGA IF ERROR
An error occurs when the system reads the I/O
I/O board hardware interface error board hardware interface.
4316
FPGA BUS ERROR Update the I/O module firmware or send the
The NC system command is in error.
NC system command error
4317 Check the machining program or the macro
ILLEGAL COMMAND
content.
The NC parameter does not exist or the MLC is
NC parameter error not ready.
4318
NC PARA NOT LOAD Restart the controller, update firmware, or send
The NC parameter does not exist or the MLC is
NC parameter error not ready.
4319
NC PARA NOT EXIST Restart the controller, update firmware, or send
The tool magazine axis number is not defined or
Tool magazine axis error defined repeatedly.
431A
ATC UNDEFINED CONFLICT
Check the parameter settings.
The NC parameter is in error.
NC parameter error Make sure no parameter values are set to 0, such
431B
INVALID NC PARA as the encoder pulse number, the gear numbers
of the output shaft and motor end.
Spindle voltage output does not match the motor
rotation direction.
Spindle polarity error 1. Check if the spindle encoder OA/OB wiring is
431C correct.
SPINDLE POLARITY ERROR
2. By setting Bit 6 of Pr51, you can adjust the
OA/OB phase sequence of the spindle encoder
feedback.
15-8

This alarm occurs when the Servo On / Off action
is executed in AUTO mode and the position
overflow occurs on the specified axis, so the
15
Servo overflow protection system does not execute this Servo On / Off
4FFC
SERVO OVERFLOW PROTECTION action.
Check the servo parameters for preventing
position overflow.
When the motion command is issued, the
position feedback did not change.
1. Check the servo settings, such as the torque limit
Position feedback protection is too low, bandwidth is too low, or the maximum
4FFD
POSITION FEEDBACK PROTECTION rotation speed is too low.
2. Check if the servo feedback signal wiring
functions normally.
3. Check if the motor rotates normally.
There is an overspeed motion command.
Overspeed protection Make sure the parameter settings are not set too
4FFE
UNEXPECTED ACC. PROTECTION high, such as the output gear ratio and cutting
speed setting.
15-9
15.1.6 Machining related alarms (B000 - B0FF)
15
Illegal G code line number The G code line number is illegal.
B000
ILLEGAL GCODE LINE NUMBER Check the machining program.
Illegal G code length The G code length is illegal.
B001
ILLEGAL GCODE LENGTH Check the machining program.
G code file not found The G code file is not found.
B002
GCODE FILE NOT FOUND Check the file contents.
Invalid file name loaded The name of the loaded file is invalid.
B003
NO SPECIFIC O FILE Reload the program file.
An error occurs when the system computes the
Workpiece coordinates computing error workpiece coordinates.
B004
PPO WRK COORD OVERLAP
Reset the workpiece coordinates.
B005
PPO WRK COORD EMPTY
B006
PPO WRK COORD MISMATCH
Servo port setting conflict There is a conflict in the servo port settings.
B007
SERVO PORT CONFLICT Check the parameter settings.
An error occurs when the system internal
Memory overlap program is operating.
B008
PPO G BUF OVERLAP Reload the machining program or update the
firmware.
The G code buffer is in error.
G code buffer error
B009 Reload the machining program or update the
PPO G BUF EMPTY
firmware.
An error occurs to the computing interpolator
Interpolator cmd index Err command index in the system.
B00A
PPO CMD IDX MISMATCH Reload the machining program or update the
firmware.
An error occurs when the system accesses the
INTRPL cmd BUF access Err buffer of the computing interpolator command.
B00B
PPO CMD BUF EMPTY Reload the machining program or update the
firmware.
The feedrate is undefined.
Undefined feedrate
B00C Check the machining program and define the
UNASSIGNED FEEDRATE
feedrate.
Arc radius calculation is in error.
Arc radius error
B00D Check the arc machining program or increase the
RADIUS MISMATCH
tolerance for arc radius error.
The specified tool number is in error during tool
Tool No. selection Err change or T code execution.
B00E
INVALID CUTTER Check the changed tool number and if the T code
setting is within the tool setting range.
The number of the connection axes does not
Servo connection axes Err match the parameter setting.
B00F
SERVO CONNECTION ERROR Check the set channel port number and the
connecting servo station number setting.
Breakpoint No. not found Breakpoint search is assigned to M99.
B010
SEARCH CONFLICT Reset the breakpoint search line number.
15-10

The system cannot correctly calculate the tool
Incorrect tool compen. radius radius compensation value specified in the G
B014 TOOL COMPENSATION RADIUS code.
15
ERROR
Check the G codes and modify the program.
This alarm occurs when the synchronous function
is enabled and you use the G code to specify the
Sync cmd error slave axis moving amount.
B015
INVALID SYNCHRONOUS COMMAND Check the machining program. After the
synchronous function is enabled, do not specify
the slave axis moving amount in the G code.
The tool compensation number in the G code
Tool assignment error exceeds the number range.
B017
INVALID TOOL ASSIGNMENT Adjust the tool compensation number setting in
the G code.
An error occurs when the system checks for the
Cmd transfer not allowed command transfer in MDI mode.
B018
INVALID TRANSITION CHANGE Command transfer can only be done before the
machining program is executed.
The axis does not receive G code motion
Servo command error commands when the servo is off.
B019
INVALID SERVO COMMAND Check if the command axis is in the Servo Off
state.
The processing amount of the interface data
exceeds the range, such as tool changing,
Data amount error magazine setting, variable writing (#_), and G10
B01A data setting.
MESSAGE BOX FULL
Check if the G codes and MLC processing
actions are operating normally.
1. The spindle is not rotating during machining.
2. Pr51 [Bit 0]: the function for checking the spindle
Spindle not running
B01B before cutting is enabled.
SPINDLE IS NOT RUNNING
Make sure the spindle rotation command is
issued.
The spindle command exceeds the spindle
maximum speed.
Spindle cmd speed error
B01C 1. Redefine the spindle speed.
ABNORMAL SPINDLE COMMAND
2. Adjust Pr409 for the spindle maximum speed
setting.
The stop function is triggered when the path
enters the restricted area.
Stroke limit error
B01D  AUTO mode: correct the G code execution path.
STROKE LIMIT ERROR
 MDI mode: move to the opposite direction of the
restricted area to clear the error.
The spindle is in analog voltage and closed-loop
control. This alarm occurs when the spindle
encoder feedback is in error.
Spindle feedback error
B01F Note: the analog output voltage reduces to 0V after this
ABNORMAL SPINDLE FEEDBACK alarm occurs.
Check if the wiring for the encoder cable is
correct.
An emergency stop occurs.
Emergency stop
B020 1. Check if the EMG button is pressed.
EMERGENCY STOP
2. Check the emergency stop status.
The chamfer / rounding command cannot be
Chamfer / rounding Err calculated.
B021
CHAMFERING / ROUNDING ERROR Check and adjust the chamfer / rounding
command in the G code.
15-11
15.1.7 Tool compensation and tool related alarms (B100 - B1FF)
15
Tool compensation is interfered or the calculation
Tool compen. interference for the tool compensation coordinates is in error.
B100 TOOL COMPENSATION
INTERFERENCE Check and modify the programmed machining
path or the tool radius for compensation.
This alarm occurs when you cancel the tool
radius compensation when the block containing
Cancel radius compen. in arc arc interpolation is executed.
B101
G40 EXECUTE IN ARC
Modify the machining program to disable the tool
radius compensation during linear interpolation.
This alarm occurs when you enable the tool
compensation when the block containing arc
Enable radius compen. in arc interpolation is executed.
B102
G41/G42 EXECUTE IN ARC
Modify the machining program to disable the tool
radius compensation during linear command.
The tool path is interfered after tool radius
Radius interference compensation.
B103
ARC INTERF Check and modify the machining program or the
tool radius for compensation.
The tool compensation path is too short.
Tool compen. amount too small
B104 Check and modify the machining program or the
SHORT COMP LEN
tool radius for compensation.
An error occurs when the system switches the
G41/G42 switch error tool radius compensation to the right or left
B105 direction.
ABNORMAL SWITCH G41/G42
Check and modify the machining program path.
This alarm occurs when the system executes
Use G31 in tool compen. G31 during tool radius compensation.
B106
EXECUTE G31 IN G41/G42
Check and modify the machining program.
NURBS interpolation is in error.
NURBS interpolation error 1. Check if the G code in the NURBS function
B108 complies with the command format.
NURBS INTERPOLATION ERROR
2. Check if the NURBS first control point is the
same as the coordinate in the previous block.
Insufficient 3D arc points There is insufficient arc interpolation points.
B109
3D ARC INSUFFICIENT POINT Check and modify the machining program.
This error occurs when Pr508 (Polygon cutting
axis setting) is set to 0 and the system executes
G51.2.
Tool axis setting error This alarm occurs when Pr508 (Polygon cutting
B10B axis setting) is set to linear axis and the system
ILLEGAL TOOL AXIS SETTING
executes G51.2.
Correct the setting for Pr508 (Polygon cutting
axis setting).
This error occurs when you set Pr634 (Axis
control variables - rotation axis feed mode) to
Illegal tool axis rotation mode linear mode for the tool axis and the system
B10C ILLEGAL ROTATION MODE OF TOOL executes G51.2.
AXIS Change the setting for Pr634 (Axis control
variables - rotation axis feed mode) to rotation
mode.
This alarm occurs when G51.2 (Polygon cutting)
Illegal polygon interpolation G code is enabled and you specified axial movement for
B10D ILLEGAL POLYGON INTERPOLATION the tool axis.
GCODE
Check the G code and modify the program.
15-12
15.1.8 Lathe related alarms (B300 - B3FF)
Alarm code Name Alarm cause and troubleshooting
15
The calculation result of the variable lead thread
is less than 0.
When you use the function of variable lead
thread, if the lead increment per turn (K) is a
Threading pitch error
B301 negative value, the thread pitch becomes smaller
THREADING PITCH ERR with the increment of the number of turns. When
the decrement in pitch is greater than the
standard lead (F), this alarm occurs.
Spindle speed too fast The turning feedrate for thread cutting is too fast.
B302
SPINDLE SPD TOO HIGH Reduce the spindle speed.
You switch the system from Spindle mode to C
Spindle/C axis switching Err axis mode while the C axis mode is disabled.
B303
INVALID SCAXIS CHANGE
Set the C axis to turning mode (Pr308 [Bit 15] = 0).
Thread cutting operation is prohibited in C axis
Thread cutting prohibited in C axis mode mode.
B304
THREADING UNDER CAXIS MODE Switch the system from C axis mode to spindle
mode to execute the thread cutting operation.
In C axis mode, both SP1 and SP2 are set to
C axis/spindle mode error voltage mode.
B305
SPINDLE MODE ERR Adjust the spindle control mode settings of SP1
and SP2.
In Spindle mode, the breakpoint search is in
Spindle mode breakpoint search error progress, but there is an M code for switching the
B306 system from Spindle mode to C axis mode.
SEARCH CAXIS MODE ERR
Reset the breakpoint search line number.
In C axis mode, the breakpoint search is in
C axis mode breakpoint search error progress, but there is an M code for switching the
B307 system from C axis mode to Spindle mode.
SEARCH SAXIS MODE ERR
Reset the breakpoint search line number.
An error occurs when the system executes the
polar coordinate interpolation command.
1. Check if the polar coordinate interpolation G code
complies with the command format.
2. Check if the polar coordinate interpolation
supports G code command.
3. Check if the plane selection is switched when the
Polar coordinate interpolation error system is executing the polar coordinate
B308 command.
POLAR INTERPOLATION ERR
4. Check if there is a specified tool number in the
polar coordinate interpolation.
5. The polar coordinate interpolation mode is only
available in the following conditions:
 The system is in fixed spindle speed mode (G98).
 The tool nose compensation is canceled (G40).
 The system is in C axis mode (M2239 = 1).
This error occurs when Pr51 [Bit 9] (Spindle
Spindle target speed not reached when target speed check during cutting) is enabled.
cutting
B309 M2256 (Spindle reaches the target speed) is off
SPINDLE SPEED IS LESS THAN
TARGET SPEED IN CUTTING during cutting. Adjust Pr406, the tolerance for the
spindle target speed.
15-13
15.1.9 Command related alarms (B600 - B6FF; B64x not included)
15
G code error G code error.
B600
PPI TOKEN ERROR Check the G code and modify the program.
The subroutine called excessive program layers.
Excessive layers in subroutine call
B601 The subroutine cannot call program layers
PPI BUF OVERFLOW
exceeding 8 levels.
No G code symbol No correct G code symbol.
B602
PPI NO SYMBOL Check the G code and modify the program.
Variable symbol error The variable symbol is in error.
B603
PPI INCORRECT VAR Check the G code and modify the program.
Illegal G code symbol The G code symbol is illegal.
B604
PPI NONEXIST Check the G code and modify the program.
No G code symbol There is no G code symbol.
B605
PPI INCORRECT SYMBOL Check the G code and modify the program.
Subroutine call error The subroutine call is in error.
B606
PPI SUBFUN NONEXIST Modify the program.
Subroutine file name error The subroutine file name is in error.
B607
PPI SUBFUN NR ERR Modify the program.
Subroutine layer No. error The subroutine layer number is in error.
B608
PPI SUBFUN OVERRANGE Modify the program.
Cycle EXEC, no homing G code is executed without homing.
B609
PPI HOME NOT ALLOWED Execute homing for each axis first.
The syntax for the dwell time command is in
Dwell time cmd syntax error error.
B60A
DWELL TIME MISMATCHED
WP coord offset error workpiece coordinate offset.
B60B
OFF POS OVERLAPPED
Arc magnification ratio error The arc magnification ratio is in error.
B60C
PPI SCALE ERROR Check the G code and modify the program.
An error occurs when the system performs
Homing midpoint Err homing through the intermediate point.
B60D
PPI INTER POS NEXIST
Do not execute G28 / G29 / G30 during cyclic
Homing Err in Cyc machining machining.
B60E
HOME DUE TO CANNED CYCLE
The specified range for the extended workpiece
G54 extension code err coordinates is in error.
B60F
PPI G54 EXT ERROR
Check the G code specified range.
Macro variable type error The macro variable type is in error.
B610
MACRO TYPE MISMATCH Check the macro and modify the program.
Macro not found The macro command is not found.
B611
MACRO NOT FOUND Check the macro and modify the program.
The specified N is not found when the system
Macro line No. error executes the GO TO command.
B612
MACRO INCORRECT LINE
Modify the program.
Macro bit setting error The setting for the macro bit is in error.
B613
MACRO OUT OF RANGE Check the macro and modify the program.
15-14

This error occurs when the macro performs
Macro divide by zero error division operation and the divisor is zero.
B614
MACRO DIVID ZERO
Check the macro and modify the program.
B615
B616
Macro command too long
MACRO BUF OVERFLOW
Macro Cmd operand not exist
The macro command is too long.
Check the macro and modify the program.
The macro command operand does not exist.
15
MACRO OPRND NOT EXIST Check the macro and modify the program.
Macro command error The macro command is in error.
B617
MACRO ERROR Check the macro and modify the program.
Macro Cmd syntax error The macro syntax usage is illegal.
B618
MACRO MISMATCH ERR Check the macro and modify the program.
The macro operand syntax is in error The macro operand syntax is in error.
B619
MACRO BUF UNDERFLOW Check the macro and modify the program.
Illegal macro command The macro command is illegal.
B61A
MACRO ILLEGAL Check the macro and modify the program.
GOTO tag is not found No corresponding tag is found in the G code.
B61B
MACRO GOTO NOT FOUND Check the G code and specify the correct tag.
No corresponding line number is found in the G
No line No. given by GOTO code.
B61C
MACRO GOTO FAIL Check the G code and specify the correct line
number.
User-defined macro alarm is triggered.
User-defined macro alarm
B620 This user-defined macro alarm is triggered when
MACRO USER ALRM
G code specifies a non-zero value for #6000.
The halt code is invalid.
Invalid halt code
B621 Check the G code and the halt code (M code)
INVALID HALT CODE
must be used individually.
Feedrate is negative The feedrate is set as a negative value.
B623
FEEDRATE IS NEGATIVE Check the G code and adjust the feedrate.
 Does not support linear axis and rotary axis
Interpolation axis error synchronous interpolation.
B625
INTERPOLATED AXES ERROR
Use NC300 or above models.
The following error is too large.
Excessive following error 1. Make sure the servo parameter setting is correct.
B630
FOLLOW ERROR ALARM 2. Check if the system parameter 643 is set too
small.
The hardware limit is triggered.
Hardware limit error 1. Move the axis out of the restricted range.
B631
HW LIMIT ERROR 2. Check the hardware limit wiring and polarity
settings.
1st software limit error The axis position exceeds the first software limit.
B632
SW LIMIT ERROR Move the axis out of the restricted range.
The axis position exceeds the second software
2nd software limit error limit.
B634
SW LIMIT EXT ERROR
Move the axis out of the restricted range.
Home sensor error The home sensor is in error.
B636
ABNORMAL HOME SENSOR Check if the home sensor is installed correctly.
When the system switches between the MLC and
MLC axis not stopped NC axis modes, the MLC axis is still in motion.
B637
MLC AXIS IS NOT STOP
Modify the MLC program.
15-15

This error occurs when Pr46 [Bit 15] (Pre-warning
1st software limit error (line No.) for software limit) is enabled.
B638 THE 1ST SOFTWARE LIMIT ERROR 1.
15
Modify the program.
(LINE NUMBER) 2. Check the parameter setting for the first software
limit.
This alarm occurs when Pr46 [Bit 15] (Pre-
warning for software limit) is enabled.
2nd software limit error (line No.) 1. Modify the program.

B639 THE 2 SOFTWARE LIMIT ERROR 2.
ND Check the parameter setting of the second
(LINE NUMBER) software limit.
3. Exclude the factors that cause excessive
following error: the servo gain is too low or motor
power cable UVW connection error.
Illegal G10 PAR definition The G10 parameter definition is illegal.
B650
ILLEGAL G10 PARAMETER Check if the G code is used correctly.
G10 PAR range error The G10 parameter range is set incorrectly.
B651
ILLEGAL PARAMETER RANGE Check if the G code parameter range is correct.
No spindle speed for cycle There is no spindle speed in the cycle command.
B652
PPI CANNED S ERR Check the G code and specify the spindle speed.
No feedrate for cycle There is no feedrate in the cycle command.
B653
PPI CANNED F ERR Check the G code and specify the feedrate.
The usage of the cycle command is illegal.
Illegal cycle command
B654 Check the G code and modify the cycle
PPI CANNED NOT EXIST
command.
15-16

alarms (B640 - B645)
15
Overheat The temperature exceeds the sensing range.
B640
OVERHEAT Check the sensor's output specification.
The temperature sensor is disconnected.
Temperature sensor disconnected
B642 Check if the wiring for the temperature sensor
THERMO SENSOR DISCONNECT
functions normally.
The temperature sensor is in error.
Temperature detection error
B643 Check if the temperature sensor is installed
SENSOR WRONG
correctly.
This alarm occurs when the following error
between the master and slave axes exceeds the
range specified in Pr642 during synchronous
Excessive synchronous following error motion control.
B645 SYNCHRONOUS FOLLOW ERROR
1. Check if the servo gain for the master and slave
ALARM
axes is compatible.
2. Eliminate the factors that cause the following
error of the slave axis.
15.1.11 Lathe cycle command alarms (B10D, B6A1 - B6A5)

This alarm occurs when G51.2 (Polygon cutting)
Polygon cutting G code error is enabled and you have specified axis
B10D ILLEGAL POLYGON INTERPOLATION movement for the tool axis in the G code.
GCODE
Check and modify the machining program.
No specified line number is found in the cycle
No specified line No. in G70 - G73 command.
B6A1
G70 ~ G73 ILLEGAL LINE NUMBER Check the G code and modify to the correct line
number.
The cycle command did not specify the line
No line No. given by G70 - G73 number.
B6A2
G70 ~ G73 NO LINE NUMBER Check the G code and add the correct line
number.
The taper calculation of the thread cutting cycle
Cycle command taper error command is in error.
B6A3
ILLEGAL TAPER AMOUNT
Modify the G code and check related parameters.
Chamfer command error The chamfer geometry dimension is incorrect.
B6A4
GEOMETRY ERROR OF CHAMFER Modify the G code and check related parameters.
Illegal drilling / tapping Drilling / tapping cannot be executed.
B6A5
ILLEGAL DRILL / TAPPING Check the G code and the C axis status.
15-17
15
15-18
Revision History
Release Date Version Chapter Revision contents
V1.0
April, 2020
(First edition)
For relevant information about [Delta CNC Lathe Machine Solution - Operation and Maintenance
Manual], please refer to:
(1) Delta CNC Lathe Machine Solution - G Command Guidelines

(2) Delta CNC NC Series Solution - MLC Application Manual
1
Revision History Lathe Machine Operation and Maintenance Manual

Delta Ia-Cnc Lathe Application Om MM en 20200430

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Delta Ia-Cnc Lathe Application Om MM en 20200430

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Delta Ia-Cnc Lathe Application Om MM en 20200430

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Delta CNC Lathe Machine Solution Operation and Maintenance Manual

Industrial Automation Headquarters

Delta CNC Lathe Machine

This manual includes:

NC controller product features:

How to use this manual:

Delta technical services:

The symbols of “DANGER”, “WARNING” and “STOP” indicate:

Maintenance and Inspection

Wiring of Communication Circuit

Product Inspection and Model Explanation

Table of Group Function

Introduction to NC System Modes

Position (POS) Group

Program (PRG) Group

Offset (OFS) Group

Diagnosis (DGN) Group

Alarm (ALM) Group

Graph (GRA) Group

Parameter (PAR) Group

Software (SOFT) Group

How to check MLC status

MLC Special M Relay and Special D Register

1.1 Product inspection ·············································································1-2

1.1 Product inspection

1.2 Model explanation

NC series controller (MOP integrated)

(1) Series name

(3) Screen orientation

(4) Series type

OPENCNC series controller

(1) Series name

(2) Series type

1.3 Product interface of NC controller

No. Item No. Item

No. Item No. Item

No. Item No. Item

(This page is intentionally left blank.)

2.1 Precautions ······················································································2-2

2.2 Ambient storage conditions

NC2 series lathe controller

OPENCNC series controller

2.3 Ambient installation conditions

2.4 Mounting direction and space

2.5 Outline and mounting dimensions

NC200-A-LI-A_ dimension drawing

NC200-P-LI-A_ dimension drawing

Outline dimension table

Note: this is the minimum required space for installation.

Mounting dimension table

Appearance and dimension tables of OPENCNC series

NC30E(H) dimension drawing

Outline dimension table

Mounting dimension table

2.6 OPENCNC operating interface installation

 Connection through computer and network

(This page is intentionally left blank.)

3.1 Product interface ···············································································3-2

3.1 Product interface